UG IR5000 Scan

, imageRUNNER
5 0 0 0 Series
User's Guide
imageRUNNER 5000 Series

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series. This Manual describes the method
of using the imageRUNNER 5000 Series, its Copy and Mail Box functions, and the parts that are
common to each function.
Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the imageRUNNER 5000 Series in order to
familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this
manual store it in a safe place for future reference.
CAUTION:
In this manual, CAUTION MESSAGES with this A symbol indicate that neglecting the
suggested procedure or practice could result in personal injury.
--
NOTICE:
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and
omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, some of the data contained
herein may not exactly reflect the current model of the particular product with which this manual
has been included. If you have a need for an exact specification, please contact Canon for the
current specification.
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another
language without prior written consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright 02000 Canon Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
International Energy Star-Program

As an ENERGY STAR@Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined that this
copier model meets the ENERGY STA* Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR@Office Equipment Program is an international program that

promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program
backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce
energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate
voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the Operator's Manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the
manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop
operation of the equipment.
How This Manual is Organized
Before You Start Using This Machine

d APTER This chapter describes the name and function of each part of the machine, and also the
method of placing an original after switching ON the machine.
Basic Copying
Z P T E R This chapter describes the basic copy functions.
Useful Copy Functions

This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.
&rTER
Using the Mail Box Functions

4 P T E R This chapter describes the Mail Box functions that enable you to temporarily store or print
data.
Printing Efficiently
This chapter describes how to make the next copy, or a print from another function, whileca
print is being made, how to check the printing status, and how to change or cancel printing.
Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

This chanter describes the default settinas and how to chanae them to suit vour needs.
Loadi~gPaper and Adding Toner

2 APTER
This chanter describes how to load oaner and add toner.
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.
Handling Options
9 APTER This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an
optional unit.
I~TER Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to

Enter Alphabet Characters
'This chapter describes how to use the Control Card, enter characters, etc.
Appendix
This chapter describes the specifications of this machine and optional units, index, etc.
Some information in this manual is also relevant when using the Printer functions etc. of the
imageRUNNER 5000. Please use this manual in combination with the other manuals (printer man-
ual etc.) when using the printer functions.
How This Manual is Organized 3

Safety lnformation
A. Laser Safety
This Product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard accord-
ing to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the Product does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the Product is completely confined within protective housings and
external covers, the laser beam can not escape from the machine during any phase of user opera-
tion.
6. CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser
products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the
United States.The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be
attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
DANGER: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT: UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN
ABDECKUNG GEOFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELLINGLIERBR~IKT
NlCHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION: RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS
D'OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE
AU FAISCEAU.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the man-
ual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CANON INC.
3-30-2 SHIMOMARUKO, OHTA-KU, TOKYO, JAPAN
CANON U.S.A., INC
ONE CANON PLAZA, LAKE SUCCESS, N.Y. 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 DIXIE ROAD MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO L5T, 1P7, CANADA
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD, 21
CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J.
4 Safety Information
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals
The imageRLlNNER 5000 Series can also be used on a network and1or as a printer. Refer to the
instruction manual for the relevant function as well as this manual.
0 IMPORTANT
You can use the imageRUNNER 5000s as a network printer, or use the Remote UI when the Network
Multi-PDL Printer Kit-A 1 is attached. For details, contact your service representative.
The imageRUNNER 5000N has a printer function as a standard function.
imageRUNNER 5000s
+
Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit-A1
Network Guide Remote UI User's Guide

Describes how to use the machine in Describes how to operate the machine from
various network environments. a personal computer.
PSIPCL Reference Guide Setup Guide

Describes the various settings and what to The Setup Guide describes how to connect
do if trouble occurs when using the PSIPCL the machine to a network and to install and
function. use softwares that enables you to print from
a personal computer.
PCL Driver Guide PS Driver Guide

Describes how to install the PCL printer Describes how to install the PS printer
driver and how to use it. driver and how to use it.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals 5

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This
Manual
This machine makes effective use of a memory in order to perform print operations efficiently. For
example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can scan the
next person's original to make a copy without any need to wait.You can also print from this machine
by using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a
complex way, so not only copies but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their
turn before they can be output.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms "scanning", "printing" and "copying" used in
this manual are defined as set out below.There are some cases in which the scanning of an original
when making a copy, and the process of making a print are described separately.
I Scanning
Scanning an original to be copied, or

scanning an original to be stored as data
Outputting a copy, outputting data

stored in a box, or outputting data sent
from a personal computer to the
machine.
Copying:
Printing data scanned from an original, followed by finishing (stapling, etc.).
6 Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

Table of Contents
How This Manual is Organized.................................... 3
Safety Information.............................................. 4
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals .................... 5
Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual ............. 6
Tableofcontents .............................................. 7
How to Use This Manual ........................................ 15
Symbols Used i n This Manual ................................... 16
Safety Considerations ......................................... 17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
.
Powersupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 .
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 .
Warning Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 .
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker ............................... 26
Installation Precautions ........................................ 28
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Provide Adequate Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Moving the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 .
Handling Precautions .......................................... 31
Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing
ofscannedlmages ............................................ 32
What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do ...................... 33
Various Kinds of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
.
You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
You can Check. Change. and Cancel the Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting the Specifications According to the Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Displaying a Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
You can Read the Messages From the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Functions that Conserve Power Consumption ..................... 46
EnergySaverMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 .
Low-PowerMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 .
SleepMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 .
QuietMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 .
DailyTimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
.
Other Useful Functions ........................................ 48
Auto Drawer Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Auto Clear Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Copy Waiting Time Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Paper Supply Indicator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Paperoutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 .
Table of Contents 7
....... ..........
Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Machine
Parts and Their Functions...................................... 1.2

External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 ..
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1..3
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
.
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1..4
Main Power and Control Panel Power ............................ 1.6
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 .
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1..8
Using theTouch Panel Display .................................. 1.9
Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 .
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1..1 0
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. .1 0
Placing Originals ............................................ 1-11
Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1..1 2
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. .1 3
Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1..1 5
Available Paper Stock ........................................ 1.17
Chapter 2 Basic Copying
Flow of Copy Operations ...................................... 2.3

CancelingaCopyJob ......................................... 2-7
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2..7
Canceling with the '-@ Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7 .
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) ......................... 2.9
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. .9
Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
.
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass ......................... 2.12
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) ............................. 2.16
Enlarging1 Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . .2.16
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and
Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20
.
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from
Being Cut (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.22
.
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper
Sizes (Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23
.
EnlargingIReducingOriginals with Copy Ratios Set Independently
for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.28 .
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) ............... 2.32
Adjusting Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
.
Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
.
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
8 Table of Contents
Entering the Copy Quantity ................................... 2.36
Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37 .
Two-sided Copying (Two-sidedMode) ............................... 2.38
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (lb2-Sided) . . . . . 2.38
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b2-Sided) . . . . . 2.40
Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b1-Sided) . . . . . 2.43
Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book
(Bookb2-Sided). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
.
Collating Copies (Finisher) ...................................... 2.48
Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sampleset) ................. 2.54
Checking the Copy Mode Settings (SettingConfirmation) ................ 2.56
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode
(SettingConfinnationlCancel)......................................... 2.57
Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions
Making Copies of Facing Pages i n a Book onto Two Separate

Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation)................................... 3.2
Adding Front and Back Covers. Insertion Sheets and Chapter
Pages to Copy Sets (CoverlSheetInsertion) ............................
3.4
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)....................... 3.9
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between
Transparencies (TransparencyInterleaving) ............................ 3-13
Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shift)................. 3.16
Making Copies with Margins (Margin)............................. 3.18
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (FrameErase) .........
3.21
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
.
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
.
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy
Sheet (Image Combination) ........................................ 3.30
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each
Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) ................. 3.35
Feeding Different-size OriginalsTogether in the Feeder
(DifferentSize Originals)............................................ 3-40
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) ....................... 3.42
Storing1 Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory
(ModeMemory) ................................................. 3-45
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy .lob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45 .
Storing a Memory Key Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.48
Recalling a Copy.lob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.50
Erasing a Copy .lob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.52
.
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) ........................... 3.55
Table of Contents 9
.
...... ..>..
Inverting Original Images (NegalPosi).............................. 3.57
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (ImageRepeat) 3.59 .......
...................
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) 3.62
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)......................... 3.64
Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions
Flow of Mail Box Operations ................................... 4.2

Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
Printing Documents Stored in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4..5
Scanning Originals into a Box .................................. 4.8
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. .8
Adjusting the Exposure and lmage Quality before Scanning the
Originals (Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4..9
Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 .
Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.23
Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in
One Step (Two-page Separation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25 .
Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . .4.27
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.29
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print
Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.37 .
Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder
(Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.41.
Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . .4.43
Inverting Original Images (NegdPosi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.45 .
Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted
(Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
..
Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings..........4.49
Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49 .
Collating Prints (Finisher). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.51 .
Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55 .
Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed
Sets (CovertJob Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.57 .
Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 .
Printing Multiple Documents as One Document
(Merge Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.63 .
Checking the Print Result or the lmage of the Stored Document
(Sample Print) .................................................. 4.65
Checking the Document's Detailed Information ................... 4.67
Changing the Name of a Document ............................. 4.68
Moving a Document ......................................... 4.70
Erasing a Document from a Box ............................... 4.72
10 Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Printing Efficiently
Changing the Exposure During Printing .......................... 5.2

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (InterruptMode) ..... 5.3
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up ................. 5.5
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up
(Auto Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5
.
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the
Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6
Reserving the Next Job during Printing .......................... 5.7
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy) . . . . . . . . .5.7
Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs ..............5.10
Checking and Changing Printing Status ......................... 5.13
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
.
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
.
Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.18
Printing Secured Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.20 .
Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.22 .
Checking the Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24 .
Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs
Additional Functions Settings Table ............................. 6.3

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function
(Common Settings) ................................................ 6.6
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7
Setting Entry Tone. Error Tone. Job Done Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8
Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. .9
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection1Auto Drawer
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10
.
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.14
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . .6.15
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15
Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 .
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 .
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19
Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23
Table of Contents 11
Setting the Timer m (il er Settings) .................................. 6.24
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24 .
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . .6.25
Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after
Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26 .
Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . .6.27
Setting the Time That the Unit's Power Turns OFF on Different Days
oftheweek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 ..
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29 .
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustmentlcleaning) ......................... 6.30
Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original lmage and
PrintlmageOccur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30 .
Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 .
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 .
Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.33 .
Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)............6.34
Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.34 .
Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36 .
Setting Image Orientation Priority to On1Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.37 .
Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.38 .
Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.39 .
Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.40 .
Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41 .
Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.44 .
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) ....... 6.45
Setting1 Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.45 .
Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.48
.
Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.50
Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.51 .
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID
(SystemSettings) ................................................ 6.54
Setting1Changing the System Manager ID and Password . . . . . . . . . .6.54
Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.57 .
Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.69 .
Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.69 .
Printing the Report .......................................... 6.71
Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71 .
Chapter 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner
Loading Paper ............................................... 7-2

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7..2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6
AddingToner ................................................ 7-8
Consumables and Options .................................... 7.12
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
.
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams ........................................ 8.2

Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. .2
Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5
Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.18
Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.20
Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
Routine Cleaning ............................................ 8.25
Cleaning the Platen Glass1Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.25
Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
.
Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty
(FeederCleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
.
Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31 .
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display................................. 8.32
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning ....................... 8.35
When the Power does not Turn ON ............................. 8.36
Service Call Message ........................................ 8.37
Chapter 9 Handling Options
......................................... 9.2
System Configuration
PaperDeck-GI ............................................... 9-3
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
.
Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 .
Finisher-F11Saddle Finisher-F21Puncher Unit41 ..................9.8
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8 .
Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9..9
GroupMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 .
OffsetMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
StapleMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 .
Saddle Stitching Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.11 .
PunchMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13 .
Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.15
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.18
Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.21
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.24
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . .9.26
Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29 .
Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.32 .
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
.
Table of Contents 13
.-.
....... L .-.
CopyTray-C3 ............................................... 9-34
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.34
.
Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray.C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.35 .
Chapter 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter
Alphabet Characters
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled ................. .10.2

Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..10.2
Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . ..10.2
Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I 0.3
Entering the Department ID and Password ...................... .10.4
Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I
0.4
Operations after Using Copy Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I
0.5
Entering Characters on theTouch Panel Display ................. .10.6
Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I . 0.6
Entering Special Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I
. 0.7
Settinginlnches ............................................ 10-8
Chapter 11 Appendix
Specifications ............................................. .11.2

MainUnit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
.
PaperDeck-GI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 .
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 .
Puncherunit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 .
CopyTray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 .
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation ............ .11.9
Chart of Available Combination of Functions................... .11.10
Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 .
Mail Box Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1-1 4
Index ..................................................... 11-15
How to Use This Manual
The descriptions in this manual are presented using the following general format.
Separation) I -
This isalurs enables you ta copy lacing pages In a book or magazine on separale sheets of paper.
Orig~nai COPY
I
-. ...-.......
Piam Ihe origbsi on Ihs pialso gisss. You ceonolpiacs the oflgbsl io Ihs leader andcopy ii in
Ihs Tw-pegs Sspsrelion mode.
i n Ihe Two-pege Seperelioo mods, combined use with the Saddie Slilch, Twpridsd. Corer/Shad
inssflion. BoohleI. T I B ~ S D B ~ O
S B P B ~ B ~ ~ Oend
inreriaa~ino
CY . -
Dillerenl Size Oflobsis. imeos Combinsli~nimsas
k s r canno; be ref.
O. i m s p d s p a s ~
When copying lacing peger with the mo.rided mode. copy lhem wtlh Ihs Book b 2.Sldsd mods
(Sea 'Making Two-sided Copier Imm Facing Pager in s Book (Book, 2-Sidsd):on p 2-45.)
Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets

- 1 Place your Orlglnal on the plslen glsar and
press the [Spaclel Features] key.
(See .Piacing oflginak'onpPI-II.)
7
@NOTE
.a p u *en! m make q l e s in psge order, -in
copying lmm lhs Itmlpegsr and woh your way
.P
lowed.
Im ihe odginallsm down so the1 Ihe odgio~l's
lop edge ;s egBIIs1 lhs be& 01 IhBpiBIBO
01asj.
2 Pre3s the [Tw*page Separatlonl key.

A
3-2 Making Copies oi Facing Pages in a Bwk ( I w p g S q m I o n l
The above sample page does not actually exist in this manual.
1 Section Title 7 Reference

Page and chapter numbers containing related items
2 Chapter Title are provided.
3 Description of modes and examples of 8 NOTE
output Indicates notes for operation or additional
4 IMPORTANT explanations. Fleading these is recommended.
Indicates operational warnings. Be certain to read 9 illustrations
these items so that you operate the machine correctly. Illustrations to help you identify keys and parts of the
5 Subsection Title machine.
6 Operation Instructions
Numbered steps describe how to set and operate
various functions.
How to Use This Manual 15

Svmbols Used in This Manual
lndicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
A persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always
pay attention to these warnings.
lndicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons or
A damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine
safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
lndicates operational warnings and restrictions. Be certain to read these items
0 IMPORTANT to operate the machine correctly, and to avoid damage to the machine.
lndicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is
@ NOTE recommended.
The following symbols, key names and unit names are used in this manual.
Key on control panel ............ al@
' key Key on touch panel display ............ [OK] key
Unless otherwise mentioned, screenshots of the touch panel display and illustrations used in this
manual are those taken when the Saddle Finisher-F2, and the Paper Deck-GI are attached to the
imageRUNNER 5000.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options are not displayed in the
touch panel display.
The keys which are to be operated are marked with 0 as shown below in this manual.
Ready t o copy.
...........................................................................................................................
When multiple keys which should be operated are displayed in a touch panel display, all
keys are marked. Select the key which suit your needs.
16 Symbols Used in This Manual

Safety Considerations
Installation
A WARNING
Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint
thinner or other inflammable substances. If
inflammable substances come into contact with
electrical parts inside the machine, this may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not place the following items on the machine.

If these items come into contact with a high-volt-
age area inside the machine, this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots and other containers
filled with water or liquids
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the
machine, immediately turn OFF the main power
switch and unplug the power plug from the out-
let.Then, contact your service representative.
A CAUTION
Do not install the machine in unstable locations
such as on unsteady platforms or on inclined
floors, or in locations which are subject to exces-
sive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to
fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
Do not install the machine in such a way that the

ventilation ports are blocked by objects. If the
ventilation ports are blocked, heat will build up
inside the machine and may result in a fire.
Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as

they may tip over or.fallresulting in personal
injury.
Safety Considerations 17
Do not install the machine in the following loca-
tions.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location which is exposed to direct sunlight
--A location subject to high temperatures
A location that is subject to open flames
Do not remove the machine's fixing stoppers

after the machine has been installed, as this may
cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in
personal injury.
Power Supply
A WARNING
Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also,
do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or
pull on or excessively bend it, as this could
cause electrical damage and result in a fire or
electrical shock.
Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet

hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
18 Safety Considerations
Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot,
as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Insert the power cord completely into the outlet,

as failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
Do not use power cords other than the provided

power cord, as this may result in a fire or electri-
cal shock.
As a general rule, do not use extension cords.

Using an extension cord may result in a fire or
electrical shock. If an extension cord must be
used, however, untie the cord binding and insert
the power plug completely into the extension
cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between
the power and extension cords.
A CAUTION
Do not use power supplies with voltages other
than 120 V AC, as this may result in a fire or elec-
trical shock.
Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging

the power plug. Pulling on the power cord may
expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise dam-
age the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this
could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire
or electrical shock.
Leave sufficient space around the power plug so

that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are
placed around the power plug, you will be unable
to unplug it in an emergency.
Handling
A WARNING
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the
machine.There are high-temperature and high-
voltage components inside the machine which
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If the machine makes strange noises, or emits

smoke, heat or unusual smells, immediately turn
OFF the main power switch and unplug the
power plug from the outlet.Then, contact your
service representative. Continued use of the
machine in this condition may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
Do not use highly flammable sprays near the
machine. If gas from these sprays comes into
contact with the electrical components inside the
machine, this may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
When moving the machine, first turn OFF the

power switch, and then unplug the power plug.
Failure to do so will damage the power cord
which may cause a fire or electrical shock.
Do not drop paper clips, staples or other metal

objects inside the machine. Also, do no1spill
water, liquids or flammable substances (alcohol,
benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine.
If these items come into contact with a high-volt-
age area inside the machine, this may result in a
fire or electrical shock. If these items are
dropped or spilled inside the machine, immedi-
ately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug
the power plug from the socket.Then, contact
your service representative.
A CAUTION
Close the Feeder gently to avoid catching your
hand, as this may result in personal injury.
Do not touch the Finisher while the machine is

printing, as this may result in personal injury.
T u r n OFF the power switch for safety when the

machine will not be used for a long period of time
such as overnight. Also, unplug the power plug
for safety when the machine will not be used for
an extended period of time such as during con-
secutive holidays.
-- -
._-
- _ -__--
.
Do not place your hand in the part of the tray
where stapling is performed while a Finisher is
attached, as this may result in personal injury.
Maintenance and Inspections

A WARNING
When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the
main power switch and unplug the power plug.
Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire
or electrical shock.
Clean the machine using a firmly wrung-out cloth

dampened with a mild cleansing detergent. Do
not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other
flammable substances. If flammable substances
come into contact with a high-voltage area inside
the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
Do not throw used toner bottles into open

flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining
inside the bottles and result in burns or a fire.
A CAUTION
Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least
once a year, and clean the area around the base
of the plug's metal pins to ensure all dust is
removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may
result in a fire.
There are some areas inside the machine which

are subject to high voltages and high tempera-
tures.Take adequate precautions when perform-
ing internal inspections to avoid burns or
electrical shock.
The simbol inside the machine indicates that

the area is subject to high temperature, and not
to be touched without care.
When removing jammed paper or when inspect-

ing the inside of the machine, do not allow neck-
laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch
the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.
When removing paper which has become

jammed inside the machine, take care not to
allow the toner on the jammed paper to come
into contact with your hands or clothing, as this
will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become
dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing with warm water will set the toner and
make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
When removing paper which has become

jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper
from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth.
If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immedi-
ately with cold water and consult a physician.
When loading paper or removing jammed origi-

nals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the original or paper.
When removing used toner bottles from the toner

supply port, remove the bottles carefully to pre-
vent toner from scattering and entering your
eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or
mouth, wash immediately with cold water and
consult a physician.
A WARNING
Do not throw toner bottles into open flames, as
this may cause the toner to ignite and result in
burns or a fire.
Do not store toner bottles or paper in places

exposed to open flames, as this may cause the
toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a
fire.
When discarding the toner bottles, put the bot-

tles in a bag to prevent the toner from scattering,
and dispose of it as a non-flammable.
A CAUTION
Keep toner and other consumables out of the
reach of small children. If these Items are
ingested, consult a physician immediately.
Warning Indications
A CAUTION
The laser unit inside the machine emits laser light. Under no circumstances open the cover of the
laser unit or remove the label attached to the cover. If the laser light escapes from the machine,
exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current.
Be sure to test the breaker once or twice a month using the following procedure.
0 IMPORTANT
Make sure that the main power is turned ON, and the machine is neither printing nor scanning before
starting periodic inspection of the breaker.
If a malfunction occurs after a periodic inspection, contact your service representative.
1 Press the test button located at the bottom left

of this machine.
@ NOTE
Push the test button with the tip of the ball-point
pen, etc.
For details of the location of the breaker when the
Finisher is attached, see Ynternal View,"on p. 1-3.
2 Push down the breaker lever to OFF ('' '' 0

side), and confirm that the power is cut OFF. v
0 IMPORTANT
Do not use the test button to turn the power ON
and OFF:
If the breaker lever does not go to OFF ("0 "
side), repeat step 1.
If the breaker lever does not go to OFF ("0 "
side) despite carrying out the above procedure
two or three times, contact your service repre-
sentative.
3 Once you confirmed that the above operation

takes place, press the main power switch to
OFF (" 0" side).
26 Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

4 Move the breaker lever to ON (" I "side).
6 Fill in the check sheet for the periodic inspection of the breaker at the end of this manual.
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker 27

Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
Avoid locations which are subject to low
temperatures and low humidity, or high
temperatures and high humidity.
For example, avoid installing the machine near
water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers,
air conditioners, heaters and stoves.
Avoid installing the machine in the direct

sunlight.
If unavoidable, shade the machine using cur-
tains.
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

During use, the machine generates ozone.
However, the amount of ozone generated is not
enough to affect the human body. Neverthe-
less, if the machine is used for a prolonged
period of time in a poorly ventilated room, or
when making a large quantity of prints, be sure
to ventilate the room to make the working envi-
ronment as comfortable as possible.
Avoid locations where a considerable
amount of dust accumulates.
28 Installation Precautions
Avoid locations where ammonia gas is
emitted.
Avoid locations near volatile flammables,
such as alcohol or paint thinner.
Avoid locations which are subject to vibra-
tions.
For example, avoid installing the machine on
unstable floors or stands.
Avoid rapid changes in temperature.

If the room in which the machine is installed .is
rapidly heated from a low temperature, con-
densation may form inside the machine. This
can adversely affect print quality or result in an
inability to obtain print images.
Avoid installing the machine near comput-
ers or other precision electronic equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated
by the machine during printing can adversely
affect the operation of such equipment.
Avoid installing the machine near televi-
sions, radios or other similar electronic
equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and
picture signal reception, etc. Plug the machine
into a dedicated power outlet and maintain as
much space as possible between the machine
and other electronic equipment.
About the machine's fixing stoppers.
- Do not remove the machine's fixing stoppers after
the machine has been installed.
- If you put weight on the front of the machine while
the paper drawers or units within the machine are
pulled out all the way, the machine might fall for-
ward. To prevent this from happening, make sure
that the machine's fixing stoppers are set in place.
Installation Precautions 29
Select a Safe Power Supply
Plug the machine into a 120V AC outlet.
Do not plug other electrical equipment into
the outlet to which the machine is con-
nected.
Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug
power strip. Doing so might cause a fire.
*'The power cable may become damaged if it
is often stepped on or heavy objects are
placed on it. Continued use of a damaged
power cable can lead to an accident.
Provide Adequate Installation Space

Provide enough space on each side of the
machine for unrestricted operation.
When the Paper Deck-Gl, the Saddle Finisher-F2, W h e n the Copy Tray-C3 is
and the Puncher Unit-B1 are attached. attached.
(Each option in extended condition)
more than 2-318" (60 mm) !
I- 85-118" (2,162 mm) 52-518" (1,335 mm)

*I
Moving the Machine

If you intend to move the machine, contact
your service representative beforehand.
30 Installation Precautions
Handling Precautions
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify
the machine.
Some parts inside the machine are subject
to high voltages and temperatures. Take
adequate precaution when inspecting the
inside of the machine. Do not carry out any
inspections not described in this manual.
Be careful not to drop any foreign objects

such as paper clips or staples inside the
machine. If a foreign object comes into con-
tact with electrical parts inside the machine,
it might cause a short circuit and result in a
fire or an electrical shock.
If there is unusual noise or smoke, immedi-
ately turn the main power switch OFF, then
call your service representative. Using the
machine in this state might cause a fire or
an electric shock. Also, avoid placing
objects around the plug so that the machine
can be unplugged whenever necessary.
Do not turn the main power switch OFF or
open the front door during the operation.
This might result in paper jams.
To avoid danger of ignition, do not use flam-
mable aerosol products near the machine.
If the machine will not be used for a pro-
longed period of time, for example during
the night, turn the main power switch OFF.
.'There may be an accident or a defect with the
hard disk in the machine, causing loss, destruc-
tion or alternation of data received or stored on
the hard disk.You are recommended not to store
data on the hard disk without having copies or
print-outs of such data outside.
A CAUTION
CANON RECOMMENDS'THA'T DATA STORED ONTHE
PRODUCT'S HARD DlSK DRIVE BE DUPLICATED OR
BACKED UPTO PREVENT ITS LOSS INTHE EVENT OF
FAILURE OR OTHER MALFUNCTION OFTHE HARD
DlSK DRIVE. NEITHER CANON NOR ANY SERVICE
PROVIDER WILL BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF DATA STORED ONTHE PRODUCT'S HARD
DlSK DRIVE (SEETHETERMS OFTHE PRODUCT'S
LIMITED WARRANTY FOR MORE DETAILS).
Handling Precautions 31
--- -
-. -- -
%
.-
L
A-
Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use
and Printing of Scanned Images
Using your Scanner to reproduce certain documents, and the printing and use of such reproduc-
tions, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list
of these document is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain of
the legality of using your Scanner to reproduce any particular document, and/or the printing and use
of such reproductions, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
Paper money
Travelers Cheques
Money Orders
Food Stamps
.Certificates of Deposit
Passports
Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Immigration Papers
Identifying badges or insignias
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Selective Service or draft papers
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
C h e c k s or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
Stock Certificates
Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
Copyrighted WorksNVorks of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
32 Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned
Images
What the imaaeRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do
Most operations for using this machine are done from the touch panel display. By pressing the keys
following the messages in the touch panel display, you can utilize the functions of this machine.
Various Kinds of Copies

Basic Features Screen
een below, which appears when the machine is ready to make copies, is called the Basic Features
Ready t o copy.
. .
JobIPrint monitor area

Displays the current status of the copy job or other functions.
Press to select the paper and the feeding posi- Press to make copies at a different copy ratio.
tion of the paper. (See "Selecting the Copy Pa- (See "Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)," on
per Size (Paper Select), " on p. 2-9.) p. 2- 16.)
What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 33

Press to select or cancel Collate, Group, or Press to select or cancel the Two-sided mode.
Staple collate modes. (See "Collating Copies You can copy one-sided/ two-sided originals
(Finisher), " on p. 2-48.) and facing pages of an original, such as
*When you select the [Collate] key. books, on both the front and back sides of the
paper, and make one-sided copies from two-
sided originals. (See "Two-sided Copying (Two-
sidedMode), " on p. 2-38.)
-When you select the [I b2-Sided]key.
- 1111l111
--
-11111
=
--
-
--
--
--
--
--
llll
-11ll111l
ill 0
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to manually con- Press to copy originals specifying the image
trol the copy exposure. Press the [A] key to se- quality (text only, text and photo, photo only).
lect or cancel Auto Exposure Control. (See You can also select the type of photo (printed
'Adjusting Exposure and lmage Quality (Copy Ex- imagelphoto) when you set the photo mode in
posure), " on p. 2-32.) the Additional Functions beforehand. (See
'Selecting lmage Quality," on p. 2-33.)
SCENE
Press to select the Special Features mode. Press to check the printing status, change the
(See Chapter 3 "Useful Copy Functions".) printing sequence or cancel printing. (See
"Checking and Changing Printing Status, " on
p. 5-13.)
34 What the imageRLINNER 5000 Series Can Do

Special Features Screen
'when you press the [Special Features] key in the Basic Features screen, the Special Features screen appearsb
in the touch panel display. The Special Features screen displays special functions available for copying. In
some functions, when a function is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears.
To close the Special Features screen and return to the Basic Features screen, press the [Done] key. Pressing
the5 key after selecting a function brings up a help screen with guidance information.
J
Special Features Screen 112
Press to select or cancel the Two-page Sepa- Press to add covers. Also press to add inser-
ration mode. This mode enables you to copy tion sheets or chapter pages between speci-
two pages of an opened book onto separate fied pages. (See 'Adding Front and Back
copy sheets. (See "Making Copies of Facing Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages
Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy to Copy Sets (CovertsheetInsertion), " on p. 3-4.)
Sheets (Two-page Separation), " on p. 3-2.) *When you select the [Front Cover] key.
REPORT

Press when making copies of several originals Press to select or cancel the Transparency
to form a booklet. (See "Making Copies for Use Interleaving mode. This mode enables you to
as a Booklet (Booklet)," on p. 3-9.) insert a sheet between each transparency
when copying transparencies. (See "Making
Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved be-
tween Transparencies(TransparencyInterleaving)," on
REPORT
Transparency
..........
Interleaf
sheet
Press to select or cancel the Shift mode. This Press to select or cancel the Margin mode.
mode enables you to shift the position of the This mode enables you to create margins
original image on the copy sheet. (See "Making along the sides of copies. (See "Making Copies
Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shift)," on with Margins (Margin), " on p. 3-18.)
p. 3- 16.)
36 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Press to select or cancel the Frame Erase Press to select or cancel the lmage Combina-
mode. This mode enables you to eliminate tion mode. This mode enables you to automat-
dark border areas and lines that appear arbund ically reduce two, four or eight originals to fit on
original images, or shadows from punched a one-sided or two-sided copy sheet. (See "Re-
holes. (See "Erasing Shadows and Frame ducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a
Lines from Copies (Frame Erase), " on p. 3-2 1.) Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination), " on p. 3-
*When you select the [Original Frame Erase] 30.)
key. .When you select the [2On 11 key.
Frame Erase
selected
Frame Erase
not selected
Press to select or cancel the lmage Separation Press to make copies feeding different-size
mode. This mode enables you to divide an originals together in one group in the feeder.
original into 2 or 4 sections and enlarge each (See "Feeding Different-size Originals Togeth-
section onto a copy sheet of specified size. er in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)," on p. 3-40.)
(See "Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections
and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate
Copy Sheet (Image Separation), " on p. 3-35.)
*When you select the [I to 21 key. 7" original
1 1 "XI
LTR original
Original feeding,
direction

Press to divide the originals into several parts Press to store or recall copy jobs. (See "Stor-
and scan them, then subsequently print them ing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in
all together. This is convenient when you can- Memory (Mode Memory), " on p. 3-45.)
not load all of the originals that you want to
copy at one time. (See 'Copying Separately-
Set Originals (Job Build), " on p. 3-42.)
Press to recall a previously set copy job.

(See "Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall), "
on p. 3-55.)
I 38 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Special Features Screen 212
Press to make copies with the entire black1 Press to copy an original with the image re-
white image inverted. (See "Inverting Original peated in the vertical or horizontal direction.
Images (NegalPosi), " on p. 3-57.) (See "Making Copies with the Original Image
Repeated (Image Repeat), " on p. 3-59.)
Press to copy the image of the original re- Press to select or cancel the Sharpness mode.
versed as reflection of the mirror. (See "Mak- This mode enables you to make copies of orig-
ing Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image), " inal images with the contrast reproduced more
on p. 3-62.) sharply. (See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies
(Sharpness),"on p. 3-64.)
n

You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience
/when you press the key, the Box selection screen appears. The Mail Box function enables you to store'
data scanned using this machine, or data sent from a personal computer as if storing documents in binders.
The documents (data) stored in a box can be printed whenever necessary. Also, when you set the Merge Doc-
uments mode, you can print documents stored separately together as one document.
/
You can print data

whenever desired, with
the settings necessary.
0 IMPORTANT
Each box can store up to 100 items of document or image data.
You can store a total of up to 1,000 items of document or image data, or up to 3,700 pages (LTR-size
Canon Standard Chart) of document or image data, in all boxes. Depending on the conditions under
which the hard disk is used, it may not be possible to attain the above values in some cases.
@ NO-rE
For details on how to use the Mail Box, see Chapter 4 "Using the Mail Box Functions".
40 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Box Selection Screen
Y o u can store a name of a box

or a password in the Mail Box
Settings of the Additional Func-
tions. (See Setting Specifica-
tions of the Mail Box Function
(Mail Box Settings), " on p. 6-k5.)
JJ Select a box
Document Selection Screen

& r o o eoxoo I
1 41 Document Name I Set Time
B 20000412183250 04/12 18:32
............................................................................................................
-Originals scanned in the same
..................................................................................................... way as a Copy function, or doc-
B 20000412184418 04/12 18:44
............................................................................................... uments sent from a personal
computer are stored in a box.
ISystem Monltor 41
Select a document and
Printing Screen Scanning Screen

I Ready t o scan.
1 [T a lnitlal Settlngs
Prints documents stored in a box. When you You can set various settings when scanning
press the [Change P Settings] key, you can originals. (See "Storing Originals in the Box,"
change the print settings. (See "Printing Doc- on p. 4-2.)
urnents Stored in the Box." on D. 4-5.)
JJ 'la@ key
- A -A - - --.---.--
You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs
System Monitor Screen
By using the System Monitor screen, you can check the status of a printing document,
ify the printing priority.
@ NOTE
For a description of functions, see Chapter 5 "Printing Efficiently':
The status of each icon displayed in the screen are as follows:
:Copy job :Error
:Printer job : Paper jam
:Box job :Add toner
F I
When you press the [Secured Print] key, you When you press the [Print Next] key, you can
can print the document sent from a computer change the printing order of the selected docu-
with a password. To print the document with a ment to be printed after the current print job is
password, you need to enter that password. As completed. (See "Priority Printing,"on p. 5- 16.)
these documents will not be printed unless the
password is entered, you can print classified
documents preventing other people from ob-
serving them. (See "Printing Secured Docu-
ments, " on p. 5-20.)
42 What the imageRUlVNER 5000 Series Can Do

Setting the Specifications According to the Method of Use
Additional Functions Screen
himdF-
T ~ h e nyou press the @ key, the Additional Functions screen appears in the touch panel display. With ~ d - \
ditional Functions, you can set the specifications common to all functions. By pressing the [Copy Settings] key,
you can change the default settings of copy functions. For example, you can set Auto Orientation to On or Off,
or set the Auto Collate to On or Off.
H Select an Additional Functions feature. H Select the System Setting features.
v d
r& 10 Mana ement 4" , - "1
Settin s
Isystem Monitor ,j ~ y s t e mMonitor 41
@ NO-rE
For details on how to set custom settings, see Chapter 6 'Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit
Your Needs':
When the network printer function is not enabled, the [Printer Settings], [Report Settings], [Network Set-
tings], [Remote UI On/Oft], and Flear Message Board] keys are not displayed.
For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function.
- [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.)
- [Remote UI On/Oft] (See the Remote UI User's Guide.)
- [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)

Displaying a Guide Screen
Guide Function Screen
ressing the 3 key brings up a guide screen with information about the various features that are available with
Usage Guide [Marginl Select the type o f margin.

g [Marginl
Pressing the 3 key after selecting a function brings up a
guide screen with an explanation for that function. Use this A white border can be created
guide function if you do not understand how to use the mode ,. El on any edge o f the original
image as a binding mrgln.
................... ,..................
you are setting.
(In this example, the Margin mode has been selected.)

a, b Oulde Menu
...........................................................................................................................................
If you press the 3 key while setting [Margin], the touch pan-
el display changes to the Guide Function Screen shown on
the right. To return to the display for [Margin], press the System Monitor
[Done] key.
lnformation Guide g Guide Menu

This machine supports many functions.
mp%ii&gq
To find the right function for your particular needs or to find p%iipiimziq
q
a simple description of a function, press the 3 key while the
Basic Features screen or Special Features screen is dis-
m d
played. The lnformation Guide screen appears in the touch
panel display as shown on the right. P E T
1-
Example: When copying photo originals:
Press the [Various originals] key. System Monitor
You can display simple explanations of the various types of

originals using the [ V ] or [ A ] key. Press the [Done] key to
return to the Various originals menu screen. To return the
display to the Guide Menu, press the [Guide Menu] key.
44 What the irnageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

You can Read the Messages From the System Manager
A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the
system manager using the utility software.
@ NOTE
The message board can be used when the network printer function is attached.
The following three types of message board are available:
A message board without the [Done] key. 1 Q [Message Board1
Toner i s out.
Copyjprint jobs cannot
be performed.
System Monitor
A message board with the [Done] key.

Q [Message Boardl
@ NOTE
If you press the [Done] key and close the message Copy/print jobs cannot
be performed from
board, you can perform normal operation.The mes- 3pm t o 4pm due t o
sage appears again when the main power is turned maintenance.
back ON, or after Auto Clear has taken place. You

can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in
one-minute increments. You can also cancel this [Done]
function. (See "Setting the Time Taken for Display to
Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations," System Monitor ,
on p. 6-26.)
A message board which the message appears in the Ready t o COPY.

... . ..,.., ,............ ... ....... ..... ... . . ..
Job1Print monitor area. ..
@ NOTE
For details on how to erase the message board, see
"Erasing a Message Board," on p. 6-69.

Functions that Conserve Power Consumation
You can conserve power consumption efficiently using the following functions when the machine is
not operated.
@ NOTE
There will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time.
The touch panel display will turn OFF when the machine enters one of these functions.
You can print data sent from a computer even when the machine enters one of these functions.
Energy Saver Mode

'when the machine will not be used for a long time, you can press the key to put the machine in Energy
Saver mode. This reduces the temperature of machine's fixing unit and thereby conserves energy. To start
'
operations again, press them6 key once more. Pressing the control panel power switch also reactivates the
machine.
J
@ NOTE
The following Energy Saver Mode settings can be selected:-10% mode, -25% mode, -50% mode, and
None mode. (See "Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting," on p. 6- 14.)
Low-Power Mode
/lf the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a period of about 15 minutes after prints have been
made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. The Low-Power
'
mode reduces energy consumption by lowering the fixation temperature. This function meets the ENERGY
STAR@Program for energy efficiency. To start operations again, press the key once more. Pressing the
control panel power switch also reactivates the machine.
1
@ NOTE
The Low-Power Mode Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See "Setting the Low-Power
Mode Time," on p. 6-29.)
sleep Mode
he Sleep mode reduces more power consumption than the Energy Saver mode and the Low-Power mode.
You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire by pressing the control panel power
switch. However there will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time. To reactivate the ma-
chine, press the control panel power switch. The Basic Features screen will appear on the touch panel display.
@ NOTE
Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using your machine for a prolonged period of time, for
example at night.
The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See "Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep
after Finishing Operations,"on p. 6-25.)
46 Functions that Conserve Power Consumption

Quiet Mode
/If this machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made'
or the key operation performed, the device sounds from this machine are stopped, and the machine enters the
Quiet mode.
1
@ NOTE
The Quiet Mode settings are in the range from 0 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. (See "Setting the
Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task," on p. 6-27.)
Daily Timer
the time and day of the week set with the daily timer, the control panel power switch automatically turns OFF.
reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch.
@ NOTE
The Daily Timer settings are in the range from Sunday to Saturday and from 00:OO to 23:59. (See "Setting
the Time That the Unit's Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week," on p. 6-28.)
Precedence relation of each function

- You can set the machine to enter the Energy Saver mode when the machine is neither in the Low-Power mode
nor the Sleep mode.
- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 15 minutes while the machine is in the Energy Saver mode,
the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode.
- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 1 hour when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, or at
the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer, the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode.
- If the time set for the Auto Sleep mode to take place is shorter than that of the Low-Power mode, the Auto Sleep
mode has priority. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
- Even when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of
the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
- Even before the time set with the Auto Sleep mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of
the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
In the case of default settings :
*
(Low-Power mode : 15 minutes, Auto Sleep mode : 1 hour, Daily Timer : no setting)
V Yous&n set the Energy Saver mode whenever desired by pressing
the @ key during this period.
Energy Saver mode --------------------------------
Operation done A A 15 minutes A 1 hour Time
Functions that Conserve Power Consumption 47

Other Useful Functions
Auto Drawer Switching Function
f a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates another paper drawer
oaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.
@ NOTE
You can set whether or not a paper drawer is subject to Auto Drawer Switching for each function. (See
"Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 6- 10.)
Auto Clear Function

If the machine is not operated for a period of about 2 minutes after prints have been made or a key operation
erformed, it automatically returns the Settings to the Standard mode.
@ NOTE
You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one-minute increments.(See 'Setting the Time
Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations,"onp. 6-26.)
Copy Waiting Time Display Function

n you turn On the Job Duration Display in the Additional Functions, the display shows the copy waiting
depending on the selected copy mode.
@ NOTE
The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different
Size Originals, Rotate Collating and Rotate Grouping modes, or when the copy waiting time is less than
one minute. (See "Setting the Job Duration Disp1ay"on p. 6-38.)
48 Other Useful Functions

Paper Supply Indicator Function
r ~ h i s function shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer when selecting the paper source
(see "Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Selecl), " on p. 2-9, "Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select)," on
p. 4-49) or when paper in one paper drawer has run out during printing. There are four different indicators as
shown below.
Display Remaining paper

Paper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full.
w Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full.
u Paper drawer is less than approximately 10% full.
u Paper drawer is empty.
... .... -. . ...... .....,,.,, ,,.,
Job NO. :0001
Display when selecting paper Display when paper has run out
\ 1
Paper Output
h
'when scanning and printing one original, and when printing on free-size paper or other available paper set in
the stack bypass, the papers are output face up. In other cases, papers are output face down in page order.
For details of other available papers, see '~vailablePaper Stock," on p. 1-1 7.
1
Other Useful Functions 49

Before You Start Using This
Machine
'This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine.
a, -1
E
C I
PartsandTheirFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 . 2 I
z j
Externalview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 . .-(O
Internalview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 .
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
..
e I
i
c
.-
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 . 3
:
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
C
3
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
. tj
3
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8 . 9
a,
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
. L
,o
Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 a,
m
Touch Panel Key Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
. 0
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 F
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

. 1
Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 . 2
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 . 3
Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 . 5
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
. 7
External View
Control panel
(See "Control Panel Parts and Functions," on p. 1-4.)
.-
c
(I]
Original supply tray
I-
CD
I
.-
C
(I]
3
Paper drawer 3,4

Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of
paper (20-lb bond (80 glm2)). You can adjust the
paper drawer 3 to hold the following standard
paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGU LTW LTRW STMTR.
Paper drawer 1,2

Each paper drawer holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 glm2)).
1-2 Parts and Their Functions

Internal View
Rear side of platen glass cover
oner supply cover
ixing Transport unit (Unit 1)
Parts and Their Functions 1-3

Feeder
Feeder cover Original supply tray
Original set indicato

Lights when originals are
placed on the original
supply tray.
Slide guide Original output area
0 IMPORTANT
If the paper delivery slot is blocked, printing may not be correctly performed. Therefore, do not place
objects in the original output area.
Control Panel Parts and Functions

I:Counter Check key 6: Numeric keys
2: Dlsplay contrast dial 7: Energy Saver key
Touch panel display 8: Control panel power switch
3: COPY key (sub power supply)
4: MAIL BOX key 9: Stop key
10: Start key
19: Clear key 20: Main Power indicator

I 1: Clip holder
15: Interrupt key

14: Additional Functions key
13: Guide key
12: Reset key
1-4 Parts and Their Functions

1: Counter Check key The value of the charging counter is displayed in the touch panel.
2: Display contrast Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display.
dial
3: COPY key Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic Features screen
appears in the touch panel display.
4: MAIL BOX key Press to use the Mail Box function. 'The Box selection screen
appears in the touch panel.
5: SCAN key Press when the function is extended.
6: Numeric keys Press to enter numerical values.
7: Energy Saver key Press to place the machine in the Energy Saver mode.
8: Control panel Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When set to OFF, the
power switch machine is in the Sleep mode.
(sub power supply)
9: Stop key Press to temporarily stop a scanning operation or an output
operation of the copy function.
10: Start key Press to start an operation.
11: Clip holder Place paper clips here.
12: Reset key Press to return the settings to the Standard mode.
13: Guide key Press to display explanations of modes or functions in the touch
panel display.
14: Additional Press to set additional functions.

Functions key
15: Interrupt key Press to interrupt a continuous copy job when you need to make
priority copies.
16: ID key Press when setting the Department ID Management function.

-
17: ProcessingIData Flashes when this machine is performing operations, and lights
indicator when there is a next job in memory.
18: Error indicator Flashes or lights when there is trouble in this machine. When the
indicator flashes, follow the message which appears in the
display. When it lights, contact your service repesentative.
19: Clear key Press to clear incorrectly entered values or characters.

- -
20: Main Power indicator Lights when the main power is turned ON.
Parts and Their Functions 1-5

Main Power and Control Panel Power
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel power
switch.
Turning the Power ON
1 Make sure that the power plug is firmly

inserted into the power outlet, and press the
power switch to ON (" I " side).
The main power switch is located on the right side
of the machine. The main power indicator on the
control panel lights when the main power switch is
turned ON.
A WARNING
Never remove or insert the power plug with wet
hands.'rhis can cause electrical shock.
0 IMPORTANT
If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least three
seconds before turning the main power back ON.
@ NOTE
When the main power indicator does not light,
check the breaker.
When turning OFF the main power, press the main
power switch to the "0
"side.
1-6 Main Power and Control Panel Power

The screen on the right is displayed when the Reservation coples can be made.
machine becomes ready to scan. .............................................................................................................................
@ NOTE
In this status, jobs can be reserved. (See
"Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming
Up," on p. 5-5.)
Printer is warming up... System Monltor
2 The machine becomes ready to print after

about 5 minutes. (at a room temperature of
68°F).
Standard mode is set in the touch panel.
0 IMPORTANT
If you scan originals while the machine is warming
up, it will take longer than the time mentioned
above for the machine to become ready to print.
System Monitor
@ NOTE
The standard copy settings are as follows:
- Copy ratio: Direct (100%)
- Paper selection: Auto Paper Selection
- Copy exposure: Auto Exposure Control
- Copy quantity: 1
- Copy function: 1 -+1-sided copy
You can change the standard copy settings.
(See "Changing the Current Standard Settings,"
on p. 6-4 1.)
You can choose which functions to display in the
Basic Features screen according to the Additional
Functions settings. (See "Selecting the Initial Func-
tion at Power ON," on p. 6-6.)
If the message "You must insert a control card."
appears, insert a control card. (See
"Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box
Functions," on p. 10-2.)
Main Power and Control Panel Power 1-7
I
I ... ..' . -.
If the message "Enter the Department ID and
Password using the numeric keys." appears,
enter the Department ID and Password. (See
"Operations after Turning the Power ON," on
p. 10-4.)
After entering ID and Password, press the ID

Key. After using the machlne, press the ID
.-
V)
cn Control Panel Power Switch

.-
L
-
3
2
Press the control panel power switch to cancel the
Sleep mode and resume normal machine operations.
6
=I @ NOTE
9 The machine can receive documents from a per-
sonal computer, and print them out even in the
Sleep mode.
1-8 Main Power and Control Panel Power

Using the Touch Panel Display
Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display
The following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently.
1-1 key Press to close the current setting screen, retaining the programmed settings in the
Additional Functions screen.
Press to cancel the function (mode) that is either being set or has already been set
in screens other than the Additional Functions screen.
key Press to set the function (mode) and proceed to the next setting procedure.
key Press to go back to the previous procedure, saving the setting already set, when
setting a function (mode).
1- key Press to close the present screen.
1- key Press to decide the setting of a function (mode).
1- key The [ b ]mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set
their functions.
Using the Touch Panel Display 1-9 ~

I Touch Panel Key Display
When you press a key displayed on the screen, the key is highlighted and the corresponding
):,
function (mode) is set. Some keys may not be highlighted even when that function (mode) is set.
A CAU- ION
Press the touch panel keys gently with a finger. Do not press the touch panel with a pencil, ball-
point pen, or other sharp objects. Such sharp objects can scratch the surface of the touch panel
.-E or break it.
c
0
@ NOTE
9w Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective film from the display.
.--
When you set a certain function (mode), the characters on some keys may become difficult to see.
.-
K You cannot press these keys displayed in this way, which means that you cannot set these functions
s
C
in combination with the presently set function (mode).
Presently set function

Functions that cannot be set in combination
with the presently set function
Functions that can be set in combination -

with the presently set function
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel

If the touch panel display is hard to view, use the display contrast dial on the control panel to adjust
the brightness.
To make the touch panel brighter, turn the dial

counter-clockwise.To make it darker, turn the
dial clockwise.
1-10 Using the Touch Panel Display

Placing Originals
Set the originals in one of the following places, depending on the size and type that you want to print
and the settings that you have programed.
Platen glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, originals on heavy paper,
lightweight paper, and transparencies.
Feeder
Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the ""a
key, and the machine automatically
scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned
as two-sided image data.
@' NOTE
If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, set the Job Build mode. (See
'Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)," on p 3-42, and "Scanning Originals Separately Set as One
Document (Job Build)," on p. 4-43.)
1
I
Placing Originals 1-11 I
Orientation of Originals
You can place originals vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the
back edge of the platen glass or the feeder.
@ NOTE
If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass, prints may not be made
correctly depending on the mode you have set.
LTW STMT-size originals can be placed vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for hori-
zontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that for vertically placed originals. You can place origi-
nals horizontally when printing with Preset Zoom mode, such as LTR+ 1 1'k17': (Horizontally placed LTR/
STMT-size originals are referred to as 'LTRR/ STMTR".)
11 "x17'YLGL-size originals must be placed horizontally.
[Platen glass]
Vertical placement Horizontal placement
[Feeder]
Vertical placement Horizontal placement
1-12 Placing Originals

Placing an Original on the Platen Glass
You should use the platen glass when scanning books, originals on heavy or lightweight paper,
I
transparencies etc., into memory.
1 Lift up the feeder.
0 IMPORTANT al
c
.-
c
Lift up the feeder about 11-7/8"(30 cm), so that the i
S-shaped sensor detaches from the feeder. Other-
wise, the size of originals may not be detected cor- 5'cn
.-
1
,
rectly. c
I- 1
Return the original supply tray to its original posi-

tion if the original supply tray is pulled up.
2 Place your original.

The surface that you want to scan into memory
must be placed face down. Align the corner of the
original with the top left corner of the platen glass.
@ NOTE
Place books and other bound originals on the
platen glass in the same way.
When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to
11"x17Y LGL-size paper, place the original hori-
zontally on the platen glass and align it with the
LTRR or STMTR marks.
When copying STMT-size original using the platen
glass, you need to set the "LTRR/STMT Original
Se1ection"in the Additional Functions. (See "Distin-
guishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals," on
p. 6-16.)
Placing Originals 1-13
1
3 Gently lower the feeder.
A CAUTION
Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your
hand, as this may result in personal injury.
Do not press down the feeder hard when using
the platen glass to scan thick books.This may
damage the platen glass and cause personal
injury.
@ NOTE
When placing originals on the platen glass, the size
of the original is detected after the feeder has been
lowered. Be sure to lower the feeder before copy-
ing.
Postcards cannot be detected. Follow the instruc-
tions on the display which appears after pressing
the key and specify the original size, or select
the paper manual&.
Remove the original from the platen glass when

scanning is completed.

Placing Originals in the Feeder
Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the -@ key, and the machine automatically scans
i
them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically scanned as two-sided image data.
You can place the following originals in the original supply tray:
Weight : 13 to 32-lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
Size : 11 "x17"/ LGU CrR/ LTRRI 8 r M T
Tray capacity : 100 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))
0 IMPORTANT
Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon-backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
Check the condition of originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times. Originals which have
been fed through the feeder 30 times can become folded or wrinkled and might not be fed smoothly.
If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning an original written with pencil, perform the Feeder Cleaning.
(See "Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning)," on p. 8-30.)
@ NOTE
Place the original as far as it will go until the original set indicator is lit.
1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of the

originals.
Placing Originals 1-15 ~

2 Neatly place your originals face up in the origi-
nal supply tray.
0 IMPORTANT
Do not add or remove originals while the originals
are being scanned.
@ NOTE
When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to
1 l"x17'/ LGL-size paper, place your originals hori-
zontally.
You can place different-size originals (i.e. LTR and
1 1'k17': STMT and LTRR) together in one group
in the feeder when you set the Different Size Orig-
inals mode. (See "Feeding Different-size Origi-
nals Together in the Feeder (DifferentSize Originals),"on
p. 3-40.)
The scanned originals are output face down to the
original output area.
When scanning is completed, remove the original
sequentially from the original output area to avoid
paper jams.
Original output area

Available Paper Stock
Paper types available for this machine are as follows:
When you store the paper type loaded in the paper drawers of this machine, the type of paper
which can be set is indicated by the icons. (See "Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,"
on p. 6-12.)
0 IMPORTANT
'1 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, and 3-Hole Punch papers are from 17-lb to 24-lb bond (64 g/m2 to
90 g/n?).
'2 Heavy paper is from 25-lb bond to 110-lb index (91 g/n?to 200 g/n?).
'3 Pre-printed papers with logos or patterns.
*4 When copying on Letterhead or 3-Hole Punch papers, we recommend that you set the lmage Orienta-
tion Priority to "On" in the Additional Functions. (See "Setting lmage Orientation Priority to On/ Off," on
p. 6-37.)
*5 The 3-Hole Punch papers can only be set vertically (LTR). Set the papers with the holes on the left side
when loading in the paper drawers. When loading in the stack bypass or the paper deck, set the papers
with the holes on the right side.
Available Paper Stock 1-17

@ NOTE
For details on how to load paper, see the following pages:
- Paper drawer 1 to 4: Loading Paper (See p. 7-2.)
- Paper Deck: Loading Paper in the Paper Deck (See p. 9-4.)
- Stack bypass: Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass (See p. 2-12.)
1-18 Available Paper Stock

Basic Copying
This chapter describes the basic copy functions. 1
Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.

CancelingaCopyJob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7.. a
..K
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 . &
Canceling with the -& key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7 . 8
.-
U
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2..9 2
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.9 . m
ManualPaperSelection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10. N
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
.
.
I
Enlarging1 Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper
Sizes(Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
.
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut
(Entirelmage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
.
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes
(ZoomProgram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 .
EnlargingIReducingOriginals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y
Axes(XYZoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 ..
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32 .
Adjusting Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
.
Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
.
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
.
Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36 .
Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37.
Two-sided Copying (Two-sidedMode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
.
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals ( I b2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b1-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.43
Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book b2.Sided) . . . . . . . . . 2.45
2. Basic Copying
Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-48

.
Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (SampleSet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-54
Checking the Copy Mode Settings (SettingConfirmation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-56
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting ConfirmationlCancel) . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-57
Flow of Copy Operations I
This section describes the flow of basic copy operations.
@ NOTE
~
For details on the following items, see the indicatedpages.
- Main Power and Control Panel Power *(See,o. 1-6.1
- Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.j
- Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)
1 Press the key. , .-

0
K4
.-0
z
m
N
@ NOTE 1
If the message "You must insert a control card."
appears, insert a Control Card. (See "Opera-
tions before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions,"
on p. 10-2.)
If the message "Enter the Department ID and Pass-

R ~ n t e rthe
, Department ID and Password using the
word using the numeric keys." appears, enter the numerlc keys.
Department ID and Password. (See "Operations
after Turning the Power ON,"on p. 10-4.) 0
mI
O
Key. After uslng the machine, press the ID
Key again.
Flow of Copy Operations 2-3

2 Place your originals.
(See "Placing Originals," on p. 1 -1 1.)
@ NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to "On", the Collate mode
or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at
the point when you place the originals in the
feeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off,"
on p. 6-36.)
z 3 Set the copy mode in the Basic Features

8o
.-
V)
screen. .... ....,,.. ,..,,.,,..,..
m (See Chapter 2 "Basic Copying".)

m
CU @ NO-rE
In the Basic Features screen, you can select the
copy paper size, set exposure, image quality, copy
ratio, and two-sided mode, and select the desired
~
collating function.
Isystem Monitor {I
4 Set the copy mode in the Special Features

screen.
You can continue setting other available modes.
(See Chapter 3 "Useful Copy Functions':)
@ NOTE
The Special Features screen is divided into two
screens. Press the [ V ] or [Alkey to select the
desired mode.
5 Enter the copy quantity.

(See "Entering the Copy Quantityl'on p. 2-36.)
Start
2-4 Flow of Copy Operations

6 Press the staG
key.
If there is a current job, the machine scans the
original, then waits to print it.
Printing starts when the current job is completed.
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot change copy settings such as the copy
quantity, copy paper size and copy ratio during
copying.
@ NOTE
When scanning is completed, remove the original.
u
When the screen on the right appears:
Press the -@ key once for each original. When
s.-o
V)
scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. m
m
CU
When you want to copy a different original while

copying:
You can set the next job while copying. (See
"Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing
(Reserve Copy)," on p. 5-7.)
When you want to stop copy job before it is

completed, press the "Bkey. (See "Canceling
a Copy Job," on p. 2-7.)
@ NOTE
After you have pressed the '-& key, several copies
may be output from the machine.
You can stop copy job in the System Monitor
screen. (See 'Checking and Changing Printing Sta-
tus," on p. 5-13.)
Flow of Copy Operations 2-5
1 I I_. ---- IIIIIIII_L.YY-

.When you want to interrupt a copy job:
To interrupt a copy job when you need to make
priority copies, press the "3key. (See "Inter-
rupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies
(Interrupt Mode)," on p. 5-3.)
m
.E
&
7 When the copy has been made, remove it from
the tray.
8
.-
0
2
rn
@' NOTE
If the optional Control Card is attached, remove the
CU control Card. (See "Operations after Using Copy or
Mail Box Functions," on p. 10-3.)
- If you have set Department ID Management, press

the @ key. (See "Operations after Using Copy
Functions," on p. 10-5.)
I
1 2-6 Flow of Copy Operations
Canceling a Copy Job ~
@ NOTE
You can also cancel the copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See "Checking and Changing Printing
Status," on p. 5-13.)
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display

E
.-
1 Press the [Cancel] key on the right screen 2
which appears while the machine is waiting to
print the document.
s.-o
V)
The machine stops copying. m"

(U
@ NOTE
When you canceled a job during scanning, remove
the original of that job.
Canceling with the "'bKey

I Press the "& Key.
@ 0
@ NOTE
When canceling a job which is being printed, press
the [Cancel] key on the touch panel which appears b
during printing. 0
8 0
8Clear
2 Select the job you want to cancel from the list,

and press the [Cancel] key.
The selected job is canceled.
@ NOTE
You cannot cancel multiple jobs.
When canceling multiple jobs, select and cancel
the jobs in turn.
Canceling a Copy Job 2-7 ~

3 Press the [Done] key.
2-8 Canceling a Copy Job

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (paper Select) I
@ NOTE
When copying an original onto the same paper size at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may
be cut slightly on the copy. For details of the size of the non-image areas, see 'Won-image areasr'in the
"Specifications," on p. 1 1-3.
If you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy
paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire original image is reproduced on the copy paper
without its periphery being cut off. (See "Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from
Being Cut (Entire Image)," on p. 2-22.)
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto)

@ NOTE
"Auto"is the Standard mode setting.
1 Place your originals and press the [Paper

Select] key.
system Monitor 41
2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done]

key.
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) 2-9

The screen on the right appears. 1 Heady t o copy.
I
System Manltor
0)
-C
2
3 Proceed to make copies in the usual way.
8
.-
U
0 IMPORTANT
In the Automatic Paper Selection mode, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, XY Auto Copy Ratio,
3
rn Memory Collating, Memory Grouping, Saddle Stitch, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation,
and lmage Repeat (Auto) modes cannot be set.
CV
You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection mode when you set the Different Size Originals mode
in combination with the Shift mode or the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
You cannot use Automatic Paper Selection when copying the following types of originals. Copy these
using Manual Paper Selection.
- Non-standard size originals
- Highly transparent originals such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- Originals smaller than STMT in size
Manual Paper Selection

You can make copies after selecting the paper size and type (colored paper, recycled paper, etc.)
loaded in the paper drawer.

Select] key.
@ NOTE
"Auto"is the Standard mode setting.
l~ystemMonitor 41
2-10 Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

2 Select the desired paper size, and press the
[Done] key.
@ NOTE
The paper icon 0 in the display indicates that the
paper is loaded vertically,and the icon 0indicates
that the paper is loaded horizontally in the paper
drawers. Paper sizes with the suffix "R" (such as
LTRR) indicate paper placed in the paper drawer or
the stack bypass horizontally.
The paper sizes are displayed in the order in which
they are loaded in the paper drawers.
The paper sizes which are loaded in the paper
drawers are shown in the display.
The type of paper (color, recycled) loaded in the
paper drawers can be indicated by the icons. (See
"Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,"
on p. 6- 12.)
The display returns to the Basic Features screen,
and the selected paper size is displayed.
@ NOTE
You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) 2-11

When making copies on transparencies or non-standard size paper stock, place the paper stock in
the stack bypass. The following two kinds of paper can be copied using the stack bypass.
Standard Size
You can place standard inch paper, and A or B series paper.
P
Free Size
You can place non-standard size (4"x5-718" to 11"-518x17" ( I 00 rnrn x 148 rnrn to 297 rnrn x 432
mrn)) paper.
0 IMPORTANT
8 Note the following points when using the stack bypass.
- Copy quantity: 1 to about 50 sheets (stack about 3/16" (5 mm) high)
.-
0
V)
m - Paper size: 4'25-718" to 11 "-5/8'217" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)
m - Paper weight: 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/n?)
CU - Curl down paper before use.
(Curling amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm.))
There are some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications but cannot be fed in the
stack bypass.
Place STMT-sizepaper horizontally in the stack bypass.
Do not set different size paper at the same time.
When you set free-size paper, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, Entire Image, Staple, Hole Punch,
1 b2-Sided, 2b2-Sided, Bookb2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet,
Transparency Interleaving, lmage Combination, lmage Separation, and lmage Repeat modes cannot be
set.
@ NOTE
When copying the following originals, you cannot use Automatic Paper Selection. Use Manual Paper
Selection with these types of paper.
- Highly transparent originals such as transparencies
1 Open the stack bypass.
@ NOTE
If the paper you want to specify is already in the
stack bypass, press the [Paper Select] key, then
specify the desired paper.
If the paper loaded in the stack bypass is not the
paper which you want to specify, check whether or
not there is a current job or a reserved job.
(See "Checking and Changing Printing Status,"on
p. 5- 13.)
- If there is a current/ reserved job, reserve a
change for the stack bypass. (See "Using the
Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs,"on
p. 5- 10.)
2-12 Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass

2 Adjust the slide guides to the size of the paper.
W
.-
C
Slide Guide 2
S
When feeding large-size paper, pull out the
auxiliary tray.
Auxiliary tray 1
3 Place the paper in the stack bypass.

Align the required number of sheets of paper with
the slide guides. The surface that you want to
copy on (opened surface) must be placed face up.
Insert the paper into the machine until it stops.
The screen of step 4 appears in the display.
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-13

4 Select the paper sire, and press the [Next] key.
,
0 IMPORTANT
Set the paper size to the same size as the paper
placed on the stack bypass.
When placing paper other than a standard size,
press the [Free Size] key
# NOTE
To select A or B series paper size, press the [AIB-
size] key
a
.-C If the screen on the right is displayed, adjust the
2 width of the slide guides to match the paper size.
S
.-0
(I)
m
m
5 Select the type of paper (Plain, Heavy, etc.),

and press the [OK] key.
0 IMPORTANT
Select the correct paper type to avoid a paper jam.
@' NOTE
For details of paper types, see "Available Paper
Stock," on p. 1-17.
2-14 Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass

6 press the [Done] key.
Paper size loaded
@ NOTE presently
I
When you press the [StackBypass Setting] key, the . 1 Paper size
screen returns to the Manual Paper Select screen selected
on step 4. You can set the paper size again.
f Place your originals and program the copy set-

tings.
-
@ NO-rE
When there is no reserved job, continue the proce-
dure from step 2.
system Monltor
@ NO-rE
You can cancel the mode by pressing the key (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-15

~ Enlarging1 Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset
Zoom)
You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to standard paper size.
[Reduce] [Enlarge]
LGL -+ LTR (78 %) Maximum ratio* (400%)
ll"x17"-+ LGL, 11"x15"-+CTR (73 %) STMT -+ 1 1 "XI7" (200 %)
m
.-
C 1 1 " X I 7" -+ LTR (64 %) LTR -+ Il"x17"(129%)
z?
0
1 1 "XI7" -+ STMT (50 %) LGL-+ Il"x17"(121 %)
0 Minimum ratio (25%) *Only on the platen glass
rn
0 IMPORTANT
Place your originals horizontally in following cases:
N - When enlarging LTR-size originals to 1 1"x17'/ LGL-size paper.
- When enlarging STMT-size originals to11 "x17'-size paper.
When reducing 1 1"x17'/ LGL-size originals to LTR-size with Image Orientation Priority set to "Off", select
LTRR-size paper.
@ NO-rE
Placing an original horizontally means setting with the longer side of the original sideways.

Select] key.
-,@ NOTE
"Auto" is the Standard mode setting.
2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done]

key.
~ 2-16 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)

3 Press the [Copy Ratio] key.
4 TO reduce, select a reduction ratio.To enlarge,

select an enlargement ratio.

and the selected copy ratio is displayed.
system Monitor 41
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2-17

@ NOTE
To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.
B .-
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)
You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1 % increments.
The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and
from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.
I 0
I .
Original COPY
1 Place your originals and press the [Copy Heady t o copy.
Ratio] key.
2 Enter the ropy ratio with the [-I or [+I key or

the Numeric keys (@-a) in 1% increments.
@ NOTE
Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys
(a-a), you can change the entered values with
the [-I and [+] keys.
If you make a mistake when entering values, press
the 8 key, and enter the correct value.
2-18 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)

@ NOTE
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter the appropriate
value will appear on the screen.
w>
The display returns to the Basic Features screen, .-
C
and the selected copy ratio is displayed. 2

0
@ NOTE

I
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original

and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto)
The machine automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio based on the size of the originals and
the selected paper.
Original COPY
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot use the Auto mode with Automatic Paper Selection.
You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset
Zoom or Zoom Designation modes.
To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.
@ NOTE
If an error occurs between the Auto copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom
Fine Adjustment function. (See "Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original lmage and Print
lmage Occur," on p. 6-30.)
The paper sizes that can be used with Auto are 1 1 "XI 7"/ LGU LTR/ LTRFV STMT/ STMTR. However,
when copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the "LTRR/STMTOriginal
Selection" in the Additional Functions. (See "Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals," on
p. 6- 16.)

Select] key.
System Monitor

2 Select the paper size, and press the [Done]
key.
@ NOTE
Select a paper size other than "Auto". When you
select the [Auto] key, the paper loaded in the paper
drawer 1 will be selected.
3 Press the [Copy Ratio] key.
4 Press the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Auto] keys in that order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, pro-
vided that the original size can be detected.
If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the -@ key is pressed.
The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.

Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery
from Being Cut (Entire Image)
When copying an original onto the same size of paper at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the
original may be cut slightly on the copy.
However, if you set the Entire lmage mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based
on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire image is reproduced on the copy
without itsperiphery being cut off.
) a
0 IMPORTANT
In the Entire lmage mode, combined use with the Booklet, Frame Erase, lmage Combination, lmage Sep-
c
.- aration, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
2
0
.-
O 1 Place your originals and press the [Copy
1
3
m Ratio] key.
2 Press the [Entire lmage] key, and press the

[Done] key.
@' NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Entire Image] keys in that order.

Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy
Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)
You can change the copy ratio by specifying the original size and paper size in inches. The following
two Zoom Program modes are available.
Making copies with the same XY copy ratio (Zoom)
Designate the same copy ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions.
Original COPY
-! 9 c:
X=4" (100 mm) X=5-718" (150 mm)
Making copies with different XY copy ratios (XY Zoom)

Designate different copy ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions.
Original COPY
Y=4-314" (120 mm) ~=5-112"(140 rnrn)

0
4 C: 9 c:
X = 4 (100 rnrn) X=3-118" (80 rnm)
@ NO-rE
The designated sizes are converted to the copy ratio ("A) as follows:
- copy ratio ("A) = (copy size i original size) x 100

Making Copies with the Same XY Copy Ratio (Zoom)
1 Place your originals and press the [Copy Ready t o copy.
Ratio] key.
E
0
.Y
0
2 Press the [Other Zoom] key.
m
3 Press the [Zoom Program] key.

4 Press the [Original Size] key and enter the
original size, then press the [Copy Size] key
and enter the copy size.Then press the [OK]
key.
@ NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use
the Numeric keys (a -@) and the 8 key on the
control panel.
the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the values 0)
again. .-c
• If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the 2
[mm] key 6
For details on how to enter the values in inches, .-u
V)
see "Setting in Inches," on p. 10-8.
To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction 2
(X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently, (V
press the [XY Zoom] key.
If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message tell-
ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will
appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling
you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will
appear.
@ NOTE
Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.
To return the copy ratio to loo%, press the [Direct] key
To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the ?Zikey (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Making Copies with Different XY Copy Ratios (XY Zoom)

1 Place your originals and press the [Copy
Ratio] key.
system Monitor
1 I -- -,- ...---..rui.rui.
2 Press the [Other Zoom] key.
0)
.-
C
2
Q 3 Press the [Zoom Program] key.
4 Press the [XY Zoom] key.

--
5 Press the [XI (horizontal direction) key and the

[Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the origi-
nal size and the copy size, and enter each
value for X and Y.
@ NOTE
the Numeric keys (a -@) and the 8 key on the ....... ,..,...... ,.. . .
control panel.
the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor-
rect values. F'
.-
If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the a"
[mm] key 8
For details on how to enter the values in inches, ,
,
;
)
.-o
see "Setting in Inches," on p. 10-8. 3
m
To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press
the [Zoom] key CU
If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message tell-
ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will
appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling
you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will
appear.
6 Enter all the values, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key
To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
I I --- .,
-->.------- "-
EnlargingIReducing Originals withcopy Ratios Set Indepen-
dently for X and Y Axes ( X I Zoom)
If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can make enlarged or reduced copies with different XY copy
ratios.
The following two XY Zoom modes are available.
Manually specifying the copy ratio (XY Zoom)
You can manually specify the XY copy ratios in 1 % increments.
.-F Original COPY
si
S m
Enlarging and reducing with
different XY copy ratios
@ NOTE
If you set the copy ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the copy image computed from the original size, copy
ratio etc., is automatically rotated and copied to match the paper.

Automatically specifying the copy ratio (Auto XY Zoom)
The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper.
Original COPY
CrRR selected
LTRR
LTR
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. To
make copies, specify the copy ratio.
@ NOTE
If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size by Manual Paper Selection. If you do not select
the paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper set in a certain paper drawer.
If you specify a magnification of smaller than 25%, a message telling you to set it to 25% will appear. If it
is larger than 400%, a message telling you to set it to 400% will appear.
If an error occurs between the Auto XY Zoom copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with
the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See "Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original lmage and
Print lmage Occur," on p. 6-30.)
When you set the copy ratio in Auto XY Zoom mode, the Auto Orientation will not be performed.
1 Place your originals and press the [Copy

Ratio] key.
System Monltor

~ 2 Press the [Other Zoom] key.
m
.-C
0
3 Press the [XY Zoom] key.
.-0
V)
2
CV
4 Press the [ X I and [Y] keys and enter each

value for X and Y.Then press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
If you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key, select a paper
size other than the "Auto". If you select the "Auto",
the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the
paper in a certain paper drawer.
You can enter the value using the Numeric keys
(a -@) on the control panel.
the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor-
rect values.
~ v e ifnyou entered the copy ratio with the Numeric
keys (a-a), you can change the entered values
with the [-I and [+] keys.

and the selected copy ratio is displayed.
@ NOTE
When you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key in the fol-
lowing cases, X: Auto% and Y: Auto% are displayed a
c
as the copy ratios on the Basic Features screen.
- When the original is placed in the feeder.
- When the original whose size cannot be detected
is placed on the platen glass.
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2-31 1

I
re and lmage Quality (Copy Exposure)

You can adjust the exposure and image quality when scanning the original you want to copy.
# NOTE
You can also change the exposure during printing. (See "Changing the Exposure During Printing," on
D. 5-2.)
) g
.-
C
Adjusting Copy Exposure
You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
0
I .
.-
0
m
$ 1 Place your originals and press the [Light] or
[Dark] key.
CU
# NOTE
1 100% D LTR
Auto
o 1I
Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark]
keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to
the right to make the exposure darker.
# NOTE
2-32 Adjusting Exposure and lmage Quality (Copy Exposure)

Selecting lmage Quality
You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The
following three modes are available for adjusting image quality.
Text mode TextIPhoto mode Photo mode 1

The world's coral reefs, where The world's coral reefs, where
brilliantly colored fish and a brilliantly colored fish and a
myriad of other tropical creatures myriad of other tropical creatures
come together.
come together. Aptly nicknamed
'Tropical Forests under the sea".
these spots of breathtaking m
beauty serve as home to .-C
countlessvarieties of life, and to
US of the land. this alluring,
2
dream-like world forms a tropical
paradise filled with romance.
S0
.-
Text mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals
can be copied clearly.
TextlPhoto mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from originals containing both text and photos.
Photo mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic paper, or photo
originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos).
0 IMPORTANT
If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printedphotograph using the Photo
mode, moir6 may occur. If this happens, you can soften this moire effect by using the Sharpness mode.
(See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies (SharpnessJ,"onp. 3-64.)
Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set
mode is canceled.
@ NOTE
When you have selected the Text, Text.Photoor Photo mode, the exposure can be adjusted only by Man-
ual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be selected.
When the "Photo ModeWofCopy Settings is "On", you can select printed image or photo afterpressing the
[a] key (See "Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function,"on p. 6-40.)
If the original is a transparency, select the Text, TextIPhotoor Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the
most appropriate level.
Adjusting Exposure and lmage Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-33

1 Place your original and press the [ a ] key. Ready t o copy.
2
0
0
2 Select the type of original (Text,TextlPhoto, Heady t o copy.
...................................................................................................................
.-0
V)
Photo).
m
m
When the "Photo Mode" of Copy Settings is set to Heady t o copy.

"On", you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo] ....................................................................................................................
key. (See "Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy

Function," on p. 6-40.)
3 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key t o adjust the

copy exposure.
@ NOTE
2-34 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)

@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [A] key.
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality

Place your originals and press the [A] key.
4
The exposure is automatically adjusted to the
level best suited to the quality of the original.
@ NOTE
If the original is a transparency, you may not be
able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so,
adjust the exposure using Manual Exposure Con-
trol.
system Monltor
41
@ NOTE
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-35

Specifying the Required Number of Copies
@ NOTE
Up to 999 copies can be set. The maximum number of copies can also be changed. For details, contact
your service representative.
0)
.-
K
1 Press the Numeric keys (@-a)
desired copy quantity (1 to 999).
to enter the
'
80
.-
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot change the copy quantity during copy-
Start
3
m ing.
CU @ NOTE
The maximum copy quantity varies according to
the copy job settings.
The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of

the touch ane el dis~lav.
I l ~ y s t e nMonitor
2-36 Entering the Copy Quantity

Changing the Copy Quantity
Clear
1 Press the @ key to clear the entered number. "Iu\f/u a,up
8 @@a
Stalt
Then press the Numeric keys (0-0)
to enter the
copy quantity again (1 to 999).
@@ 0
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot change the copy quantity during copy-
ing.
Processing .-
mala Error
,@ NOTE r I 0
&--
The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of

the touch panel display.
o.-o3 l
m
CU
system Manitar
Entering the Copy Quantity 2-37

0 IMPORTANT
In the Two-sided Mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving,
lmage Combination, and lmage Separation modes cannot be set.
In the BookbFSided mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Binding Erase, Different Size
Originals, and lmage Repeat modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.
Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided copies.
# NOTE
o) When copying with Two-sided Mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen
.-K glass or the feeder.
2 The Two-sided Mode that you have set is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key in the Basic Features
8 screen.
.-
0 a
Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
3
m - Paper size : 11"x17'/ LGU LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
- Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g / d to 200 g / d )
CU There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to make
two-sided copies.
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 b2-

Sided)
1 This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from,one-sided originals.
~ Original
0 IMPORTANT
Place the original horizontally when copying originals such as LTRR/ STMTR-size originals. If these origi-
nals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.
# NOTE
If there are an odd number of originals, the back of the last print is left blank. (The machine's counter does
not count the blank page as a copy)
If the originals to be used for the front and back of the copy are of different sizes, the two-sided copy will
not be performed. These originals will be printed as one-sided copies of the respective sizes.
~ 2-38 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)

1 Place your originals and press the [Two-sided 1 Ready t o COPY. I
Mode] key.
.-
L
2 Press the [Ib2-Sided] key.
@When you select the [Option] key:

Select the type of two-sided orientation, and
press the [Done] key.
3 Press the [OK] key. [Two-sided Model Select a Two-sided copying featwe.
a
Option
i )
Two-sided Copying (Two-sidedMode) 2-39

and "1 )2-Sided" is displayed above the [Two-sided
1 Mode] key.
System Monitar.
I
0)
.
3
:
0 # NOTE
.-0 When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and
3
m press the -@ key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b2-

Sided)
~ This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make two-sided
copies.
1 Original
I
2-40 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)
1 Place your originals in the feeder and press
the [Two-sided Mode] key.
# NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to "On': the Collate mode
on p. 6-36.)
.-E'
B
2 Press the [2b2-Sided]key. 80
.-
3
m
N
When you select the [Option] key:

Select the type of two-sided orientation for origi-
nal and copy paper, and press the [Done] key.

3 Press the [OK] key.

and "2b2-Sided"is displayed above the [Two-sided
Mode] key.
I system Monitor JI
@ NOTE
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and
press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key
To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Canceg keys in that order.
2-42 Two-sided Copying (Two-sidedMode)

Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2b1-
Sided)
This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make one-sided
copies.
Original COPY
--------- iiiiiiii
__-
- 1111111
iiii
----.-...
I iiiii
-111
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0 IMPORTANT
Place the original horizontally when copying original such as LTRR/ STMTR-size original. If these origi-
nals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.
@ NOTE
When copying two-sided original placed on the platen glass on one side of different sheets, set the Job
Build mode. (See "Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)," on p. 3-42.)

the [Two-sided Mode] key.

2 Press the [2b1Sided] key.

When you press the [Option] key:
Select the type of original, and press the [Done]
key.
-@
2

and "2b1-Sidedwis displayed above the [Two-sided
Mode] key.
System Monitor
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order.

Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book
(Book b2-Sided)
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages or front and back sides of a
page in a bound original, such as a book or a magazine.
LeftlRight Two-sided
Original
FrontIBack Two-sided
Original
0 IMPORTANT
Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the
Book b2-Sided mode.
When using this feature, select LTR-size paper.
When copying with FrontIBack Two-sided, the front side of the first two-sided page and the back side of
the last two-sided page are left blank. The machine's counter does not count the blank page as a copy
Two-sided Copying (Two-sidedMode) 2-45 ~

1 Place your original on the platen glass and Ready t o copy.
....................................................................................................
press the [Two-sided Mode] key.
@ NO-rE
If you want to make copies in page order, begin
copying from the first page and work your way for-
ward.
Place the original face down so that its top edge is
aligned with the back edge of the platen glass.
.-r
2
6 2 Press the [Book b2-Sided] key, and press the
.-V)
0 [Next] key.
m
m
CU
3 Select the type of layout, and press the [OK]

key.
@ NOTE
If you select the [LeWRight Two-sided] key, the fac-
ing pages are copied onto the front and back sides
of a single sheet.
If you select the [FrontIBack Two-sided] key, the
front and back sides of the left page, or the front
and back sides of the right page are copied onto
the front and back sides of a single sheet.
The display returns to the Basic Features screen
and "Book b2-Sided" is displayed above the [Two-
sided Mode] key.

To scan the next two facing pages, place the
original and press the -0key again.
When scanning is completed, press the [Done]
key.
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode]
and [Cancel] keys in that order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the
key (The machine returns to the standard mode.)

The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the copies in various ways by pages or copy sets. The
copied papers are output face down.
When "Collate" is set:

Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and output onto the trays as
follows.
Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3

Three sets of
When "Group" is set:

All copies of the same original page are automatically collated and grouped together, and output
onto the trays as follows.
Grouped Grouped Grouped Grouped

Originals copies of page 1 copies of page 2 copies of page 3 copies of page 4
Three sets of
copies specified
When "Staple" is set:

Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, output onto the trays as
shown below, and then automatically stapled.
When you select the [Corner] (TopLeft) key:
Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3

Three sets of
~ 2-48 Collating Copies (Finisher)

When you select the [Double] (Left) key:
Originals
Three sets of
Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3
~
When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:

0
Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3 .-
u 1
Three sets of
copies specified
0 IMPORTANT
[Staple] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option).
You cannot set the Staple mode when copying on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole
punch.
[Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached.
Paper sizes which can be saddle stitched are 1 1 " X I 7'1 LTRR.
* The maximum number of sheets that can be bound at a time is 15.
@' NOTE
Place the originals to be finished into a booklet as shown in the illustration above. (See "Making Copies for
Use as a Booklet (Booklet),"on p. 3-9.)
[Saddle Stitch] can only be set when the 1 b2-Sided or 2b2-Sided mode is selected. (See "Two-sided
Copying (Two-sidedMode)," on p. 2-38.)
When "Non-collate" is set (none of the above (Collate, Group or Staple) are set):
Originals Copies
Collating Copies (Finisher) 2-49 ~

When "Hole Punch" is set:
Punches 2 or 3 holes in the copied sheets.
7"/ LTR-size paper:
When you select 11"XI
1 Original
.E
2
0 IMPORTANT
o [Hole Punch] can only be specified when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.
0
,.
.-
The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper
size.
- 2 holes: LGU LTRR
I - 3 holes: 11" X I 7"/ LTR
I N Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.
When "Rotate" is set:

When originals of the same size are placed, the pages are aligned and the copy sets are deliv-
ered in alternating directions.
1 Original
c3
0 IMPORTANT
-
You can only select LTR/ LTRR-size paper.
[Rotate] can only be specified when the machine is not equipped with the Finisher (option).
When "Offset" is set:

Copies are shifted to the front and back respectively.
1 Original
c3
0 IMPORTANT
[Offset] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option).
You cannot select STMTR-size paper.
1 2-50 Collating Copies (Finisher)

1 Place your originals i n the feeder and press
the [Finisher] key.
@ NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to "On", the Offset Collate
mode is automatically set at the point when you
place the originals in the feeder. (See "Setting
Automatic Collate On/ Off," on p. 6-36.)
2 Select the desired collate feature, and press

the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
When you select the [Staple] key, press the [Next] (U
key
The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher
(option) is attached.
The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher
(option) is not attached.
The [Hole Punch] key only appears when a
Puncher Unit-61 is attached to the Finisher. When the Finisher is attached.
The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher
(option) is attached.
When you select the [Staple] key:
Select the type of stapling ([Corner], [Double],
[Saddle Stitch]) and the position to be stapled,
0 IMPORTANT
The maximum number of papers which can be
stapled at a time is as follows:
- 1 lr'x17"/ LGU LTRR :30 sheets
- LTR :50 sheets When the Finisher is not attached.
When you select the [Corner] key:

Select the staple position, and press the [OK]
key.
0 IMPORTANT
STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.
Collating Copies (Finisher) 2-51 ~

1 When you select the [Double] key:
Select the staple position, and press the [OK]
key.
0 IMPORTANT
LGU LTRR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be double-
stapled.
1 When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:

F
,- Press the [Next] key.
2
80 0 IMPORTANT
.- [Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the
2 Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached.
m LGU LTR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be saddle : h3, 84, A4R, llX17 and
j LTRR paper sizes can be
N stitched.
# NOTE
You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See
"Changing the Saddle Stitch Position," on p. 6-32.)
Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.
A3, 84, A4R, llX17 and
When you select the [Rotate] key:

When the Automatic Paper Selection is set,
press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or
CTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key.
# NOTE
Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key
in the following cases:
- Available paper size is selected manually.
- Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal
and vertical direction.
- Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper draw-
ers loaded with available paper size is set to "On".
2-52 Collating Copies (Finisher)

When you select the [Hole Punch] key:
Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed
sheets.
0 IMPORTANT
The machine automatically selects the type of hole
punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected
paper size.
- 2 holes: LGU LTRR
- 3 holes: 1 1"x17"/ LTR
You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.
The display returns to the Basic Features

screen and the selected feature is displayed
above the [Finisher] key.
Monitor 41
When the Offset Collate is set.
3 Proceed t o make copies i n the usual way.
@ NOTE
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and
To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Collating Copies (Finisher) 2-53 1

opying (Sample Set)
~ Before making multiple copies, the copying result can be checked using the Sample Set mode.
@ NOTE
The machine's counter counts the sample print as a print.
1 Place your originals and program the copy set-

tings.
0)
.-C @ NOTE
2
s.-
0
The [Sample Set] key is displayed when you set a
mult~plenumber of copy sets in the Collate, Staple
or Cover/Sheet Insertion modes. This key is not
3
m displayed when you set the Group mode.
(U
system Monitor 41
2 Press the [Sample Set] key, then press the

-G key.
Sample Set copying starts and one copy set is

made.
2-54 Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set)

3 Check the output sheet, and select the [Start
Print], [cancel] or [Change Settings] key.
Make the remaining prints?
@ NOTE (If you want t o make new settings,
select Change Settings.)
To make the remaining copies, press the [Start
Print] key.
To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key
To change copy settings, press the [Change Set-
tings] key.
When you select the [Change Settings] key:

Change the settings, and press the [Done] key. opying sample set...
lpaoer Select I
@ NOTE
To change the number of copies, use the Numeric
keys (@ -@).
To change the exposure, press the [Light] or [Dark]
key.
To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy]
key.
To select the copy paper, press the [Paper Select]
key (See 'Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper
Select)," on p 2-9.)
To collate the copied papers, press the [Finisher]
key. (See "Collating Copies (Finisher),"on p. 2-48.)
To set a margin for binding, press the [Margin]
key (See "Making Copies with Margins (Margin),"on
p. 3-18.)
When you change the copy settings, the machine
starts printing from the first set.
T
.o copy another sample set, press the [Sample
Set] key.
Sample set copying starts and one copy set is b k e the remaining prints?
(If YOU want t o make new settings,
made. select Change Settings.)
Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (SampleSet) 2-55 ~

When the copy mode settings are selected on the Special Features screen etc., you can check the
current settings.
Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the

Basic Features screen.
The display shows the selected copy mode
settings.
system Monitor ,
1 2 Check the settings, then press the [Done] key.
~ The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
,@ NOTE
When ten or more copy modes have been set, use
the [V]key to bring up the next screen. To return to
the previous screen, press the[A] key.
The I)[ mark in some keys indicates that those
keys have another screen to set their functions.
2-56 Checking the Copy Mode Settings (SettingConfirmation)

celing a Selected Copy Mode
(Setting ConfirmalionlCancel)
From the Setting Confirmation screen, you can also change or cancel selected functions.
1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the

The display shows the selected copy mode
settings.
0)
.-C
0
i3
0
.-
0
(I)
1 l
N
2 Press the key for the copy mode you want to
change or cancel.
The copy mode settings screen appears.
@ NOTE
When ten or more copy modes have been set, use
the [V] key to bring up the next screen. To return to
the previous screen, press the [A] key.
The [b] mark in some keys indicates that those
keys have another screen to set their functions.
Keys which do not have the [b] mark on the bot-
tom right can be canceled by pressing the keys
again.
T o change a mode (example: Sharpness)
Perform the same steps as when setting the
mode. Change the setting as you desire, then
press the [OK] key.
The display returns to the Setting Confirmation
screen.
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (SettingConfirmationlCancel) 2-57 ~

@Tocancel a mode
Press the [Cancel] key.
The display returns to the Setting Confirmation
screen.
IS)
.
2
8 The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
2-58 Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (SettingConfirmationlCancel)

Useful Copy Functions
This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets
(Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
..
Adding Front and Back Covers. lnsertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to
Copy Sets (CoverlSheetInsertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
.
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies
(Transparency Interleaving). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
.
Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
.
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 .
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
.
Reducing Two. Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet
(ImageCombination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a
Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
.
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (DifferentSize Originals) . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
.
Storing1Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Storing a Memory Key Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 .
Recalling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
.
ErasingaCopyJob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52.
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
.
Inverting Original Images (NegalPosi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
.
. ,. -,, .. , . .,., .. . .,
:. - jl,. , ,,.
":;",,:..
Ph' ;'I" "' ..
*
.!-: <' ,!
I-1y-b w ,v <,*J
ing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate
COPYSheets (Two-page Separation)
~~ This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper.
Original
5
LL
0 IMPORTANT
In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet,
2
u-
o Transparency Interleaving, Binding Erase, Different Size Originals, Image combination, Image Separa-
tion, and lmage Repeat modes cannot be set.
Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Two-
page Separation mode.
When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book b2-Sided mode. (See
"Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book bFSided),"on p. 2-45.)
1 Place your original on the platen glass and Ready to COPY.

press the [Special Features] key.
System Monitor
2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key.
3-2 Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy
Sheets (Two-page Separation)
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
I

For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the
When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
key again.
41
-
C
@ NOTE 12
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], rwo-page Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that 2
order. 0"
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) 2
W I
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy 3-3
Sheets (Two-page Separation)
--- , --,-. -- .-.- .. ..
,. .. .;
;F.p
'.'?*
, , ,: ..
:.ri
.*,,;:- ,,
,.(!V,j
, , '
?'!,..
.
8
. . .
',:+,., ;
t ,and Back Covers, lnsertion Sheets

and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (CoverlSheet insertion)
This function enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, inser-
tion sheets or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main
text. In addition, the front and back covers and insertion sheets can also be copied.
0 IMPORTANT
In the Cover/Sheet lnsertion mode, combined use with the Group, Offset Group, Memory Collating, Mem-
ory Grouping, Bookb2-Sided,Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, lmage Combina-
tion, lmage Separation, lmage Repeat, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be set.
Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30
sheets (for 1 1" X I 7'1 LGU LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).
@ NO-rE
When copying on the front and back covers/insertion sheets, those sheets are included in the count of
the total number of copies.
Chapter pages are included in the count of the total number of copies.
LL
Front Cover
Adds a front cover sheet to each set of copies. The cover sheet can also be copied.
Originals COPY
Printed front cover selected in the CoverlSheet lnsertion mode.
Back Cover
Adds a back cover sheet to each set of copies. The back cover can also be copied.
Originals
REPORT
Printed back cover selected in the CoverlSheet lnsertion mode.
3-4 Adding Front and Back Covers, lnsertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to
Copy Sets (CoverlSheetInsertion)
Sheet lnsertion
Adds insertion sheets between the pages of copy sets. It is useful when you want to divide your
copy sets into different sections with a blank sheet. The insertion sheets can also be copied.
Originals COPY
Printed insertion sheets selected in the CoverlSheet lnsertion mode.

-
.-
0
C
Chapter Page 3
LL
Adds chapter pages between the pages of copy sets. Since the chapter page is always copied on
one side, it is useful when you want to divide the copy by chapter. 2
S
Originals COPY -
-
3
a,
V)
3
c9
+
Printed chapter page selected in the CoverlSheet lnsertion mode.
Place your originals in the feeder and press

the [Special Features] key.
@ NOTE
100% Auto 7
When Auto Collate is set to "On': the Collate mode
feeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/Oflnon
p. 6-36.)
system Manltar
41
Adding Front and Back Covers, lnsertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to 3-5
Copy Sets (CoverlSheet Insertion)
2 Press the [CoverlSheet Insertion] key.
-
C
.-
0
0
c
When you select only the [Chapter Page] mode,
proceed to step 5. (When you select the [Sheet
3
LL Insertion] or [Chapter Page] mode.)
x
5 @ NOTE
0
-
-
3 You cannot select the [Sheet Insertion] and [Chap-
%
3
ter Page] modes at the same time.
You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key
m again.
4 When copying onto the front cover, back cover

or insertion sheet, press the [Printed' key, and
press the [Next] key.
@ NOTE
The display will vary depending on the setting in
step 3.
The chapter page will always be copied only on
one side.
3-6 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to
Copy Sets (CoverlSheet Insertion)
5 Make the following settings depending on the
mode selected.
@ NOTE
The display will vary depending on the mode
selected.
When you select the [Back Cover] key:
Select the side to be copied onto, and press the
[Next] key.
When you select the [Sheet lnsertion (Printed)],

[Chapter Page] key:
Set all positions where the sheet is to be
inserted into the copies, and press the [Next]
key.
Specify the sheet insertion positions with the
Numeric keys (0-0).
@ NOTE
You can insert up to 20 insertion sheets (or chapter
pages).
If you want to insert 6 or more sheets, use the [V]
or[A] keys to scroll to the insertion positions.
You cannot specify the sheet insertion position to
the first page. Set the position starting from the
second page.
To cancel a specific sheet insertion page setting,
press the [V]or[A] key and press the desired
page, then press the 8 key.
When you select the Two-sided Mode:

Press the [Option] key..
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to 3-7
Select the side to be copied onto, and press the
[Done] key.
according t o 2-sided mode setting
[System ~ o n l t i l
6 Select the paper source for each insertion

sheet, and press the [OK] key.
V)
C @ NOTE
0
.-
C Select the same paper size for the front and back
0
C
3
cover, insertion sheets (or chapter page.)
LL The display will vary depending on the mode
0
2 selected.
* 7 Press the [Done] key.

@ NOTE
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and
press the 5 Lkey once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key
M ~
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Cover/Sheet Insertion], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
3-8 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)
You can copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies can be easily made into
a booklet.
Originals COPY
U)
c
8 i 1 .-
C
0
0
C
3
LL
2
When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.
-
Q-
3
a,
U)
3
m
0 IMPORTANT
In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, lmage
Combination, lmage Separation, lmage Repeat, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be set.
When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the
even number pages will be printed upside down.
Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.

the [Special
- . Features] key.
@
- NOTE
feeder. (See "Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off," on
p. 6-36.)
l~ystenMonitor 41
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-9 ~

-
2 Press the [Booklet] key.
3 Select the original size, and press the [Next]

v,
L
key.
.-
C
0
@ NOTE
L -
3
LL
To copy two-sided originals, also press the [2-Sided
Original] key.
zi To select A or B series paper size, press the [AIB-
S
- size] key
L
3
When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:

Select the type of the original, and press the
[OK' key.
3-10 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when
the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
0 IMPORTANT
The paper used for the cover page must be the
same size as the other pages.
The paper used for the main text must be from
7-Ib to 20-lb bond (64 g / d to 80 g / d ) .

T e paper used for the cover page must not be
heavier than 110-lb index (200 g / d ) .
When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot
set the paper used for the main text in the stack
bypass.
# NOTE
To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key
Insert the paper for the cover page in the stack
bypass.
The cover page can only be copied on the front.
11 "XI 7"/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.
When you select the [Add Cover] key:
Select the [On] or [Off] key to set whether or not
to copy on the cover, and press the [Next] key.
he same size o f paper as for the main document.
Select the type of paper, and press the [Next]

key.
Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-11 ~

5 Select whether or not to saddle stitch the
booklet, and press the [OK] key.
The display returns to the Special Features
screen.
0 IMPORTANT
The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad-
dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
When the number of sheet exceeds 15, the sta-
pling will not be performed, and the sheets will be
output to the tray
@ NOTE
The available number of o u t ~ usets
t in the saddle
-
v,
c stitching is as follows:
.-
0
- Number of sheets Number of sets
0
c 1- 5 25 sets
3
LL 6-10 15 sets
2 11-15 10 sets
Saddle stitching will not be performed when there
S
- is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
3
CJ
C3
@ NOTE
When you set the Booklet mode, the Shift mode is
automatically set.
@ NOTE
press the -@ key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the 2 key (The machine returns to the standard mode.)
3-12 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved
between Transparencies (Transparency interleaving)
Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass. The machine automat-
ically interleaves a sheet of paper between each transparency. The interleaf sheets protect the cop-
ied surface of the transparencies. They can also either be printed with the same images as the
transparencies or left blank.
Blank interleaf sheets selected in theTransparency lnterleaving mode.
Originals COPY
- Transparency
Blank interleaf
sheets
Printed interleaf sheets selected in theTransparency lnterleaving mode.

Originals
Transparency
Printed interleaf
sheets
0 IMPORTANT
In the Transparency lnterleaving mode, combined use with the Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, lmage combination, lmage Separation, and lmage Repeat modes cannot
be set.
You cannot make more than one set of copies at a time in the Transparency lnterleaving mode.
Even if your machine is equipped with the Finisher, you cannot use any of the Finisher modes with the
Transparency lnterleaving mode.
@ NOTE
The machine's counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies.
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies 3-13 i

(TransparencyInterleaving)
System Monitor
- - -
2 Press the [Transparency Interleaving] key.
--
3 Select the size of the transparencies, and

Select the size of interleaf sheet, and press the I[Transparency Interleaving] Specify the paper size. I
[Next] key.
3-14 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleavedbetween Transparencies

(Transparency Interleaving)
5 Select whether or not t o copy the image onto
the interleaf sheet, and press the [OK' key.
screen.
@ NOTE
When copying interleaf sheets, those sheets are
included in the count of the total number of copies.

7 Place the transparency in the stack bypass,

and proceed t o make copies in the usual way.
(See "Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass,"on
p. 2-12.)
@ NOTE
When the original is placed on the platen glass, fol-
low the instructions that appear on the display and
press the -@ key once for each original. When
scanning is completed, press the [Done] key
In the Transparency lnterleaving mode, the trans-
parencies are fed from the stack bypass and the
interleaf sheets are fed from the paper drawer.
The copies are output with the copied side face
down, with the transparency first, followed by the
interleaf sheet.
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features],
[Transparency lnterleaving], and [Cancel] keys in
that order.
key (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies 3-15

(Transparency Interleaving) I
hifted (Shift)
Makes copies with the entire image shifted to the center or a corner.
Original Copy with original image Copy with original image

shifted to the center shifted to a corner
b
.-
@ NOTE
3
LL In the Shift mode, combined use with the Image Repeat and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
Zi The Shift mode cannot be selected when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with
0 the Automatic Paper Selection.
'
0
3 1 Place your original and press the [Special Fea-

m tures] key.
2 Press the [Shift] key.
3-16 Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shift)

3 Select the shift direction by using the arrow
keys, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
@ NOTE
"Shift direction" refers not to the direction in which
the original is placed on the platen glass or in the
feeder, but to the direction of the original viewed
when the surface of the original you want to scan is
face up, with the top edge at the top.

@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Making Copies with Original Images Shifted (Shift) 3-17
1
I
- - --.
- --. -.
This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by a designated width
to the left, right, top or bottom to create a margin on print sheets. Use this mode to make copies
ready for placement in ring binders.
pi
Left margin Right margin Top margin Bottom margin
Original selected selected selected selected
...
--
I..
--
I
.
--
--
--
--
--
0 IMPORTANT
--
-
3
a
UJ
In the Margin mode, combined use with the Booklet, lmage Repeat, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be
set.
2
When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shifted to the left, right, top or bottom by a
m selected width, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to the edge of the sheet, part of
that image will be cut off.
1 Place your original and press the [Special Fea- Ready toCOPY.
tures] key. .. .. . ..... ..... ......... .. ........ .. ... .. .........
. . ... ... ..... . ...................... ... .. ..,.....,..,.
I system Monitor JI
2 Press the [Margin] key.
3-18 Making Copies with Margins (Margin)

3 Select the type of margin, and press the [Next]
key.
0 IMPORTANT
If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes
together and copying an original that already has a
margin, follow the instructions below:
- 1 b 2-sided: Set the margin for the back only.
- 2b2-sided:You do not need to set the margin. Pro-
ceed to make copies in the usual way
- 2 b 1-sided: Set the margin for the back only
If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes
together and copying an original that does not have
a margin, follow the instructions below:
- 7 b 2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and
back.
- 2b2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and
back.
- 2 b 1 sided: Set the margin for both the front and
back.
When you select the [Left Margin] or [Right Mar-
gin] key:
Use the [-I and [+I keys to set the margin for the
front and back ( 0 to 1311 6"l 0 to 20 mm). Then
press the [OK] key.
@ NO-rE
If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the
[mm] key.
The default setting is 318"(70mm).
When you select the [Top Margin] or [Bottom

Margin] key:
Use the [-I and [+I keys to set the margin (1116"
to 1311 6"l 1 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key.
NO-rE
control panel.
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) 3-19

b 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way.
# NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Margin], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
3-20 Making Copies with Margins (Margin)

adows and Frame Lines from Copies
(Frame Erase)
This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. The fol-
lowing three Frame Erase features are available.
0 IMPORTANT
Combination of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set
mode is canceled.
Original Frame Erase

Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original
is smaller than the selected paper size.
Also creates a blank border around the edge of the print paper.
0 IMPORTANT V)
C
.-
0
C
In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, o
c
Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. LL
3
Original
(STMT) Original Frame
Erase mode
selected
c3
c3
Original Frame
Erase mode
not selected
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-21
I . _._i--_-7
^
Book Frame Erase
Erases the dark border as well as center and contour lines that appear when copying facing
pages in a bound original onto a single print paper.
0 IMPORTANT
In the Book Frame Erase, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, lmage Combination, lmage
Separation, lmage Repeat, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be set.
COPY
Book Frame
Erase selected
Original
Binding Erase
Erases the shadows that appear in copies from binding holes in originals.
0 IMPORTANT
In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book b2-Sided, Two-page Sepa-
ration, Booklet, lmage Separation, lmage Repeat, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be set.
Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
COPY
Binding Erase
mode selected
Original
3-22 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals
1 Place your originals and press the [Special 1 Ready t o COPY.
Features] key.
2 Press the [Frame Erase] key.
3 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and

4 Select the size of the original, and press the

[Next] key.
@ NOTE
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only
on original sizes shown in the touch panel display.
To select A or B series paper size, press the [NB-
size] key
5 Set the desired original frame erase width
using the [-I or [+I key, and press the [OK] key.
The value set here is specified uniformly around
the original.
To set frame erase width values for the top,
bottom, left and right sides of the original
independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key.
@ NOTE
h
the Numeric keys (@ -@) and the 8 key on the
control panel.
V) message prompting you to enter the appropriate
C
.-
0 value will appear on the screen.
C
o Even when you enter the values with the Numeric
C
3
LL
keys (a -@), you can change the values with the
I-] or [+] key
2 If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the
8
-
-3
n\
iij
[mm] key
The default setting is 1/8"(4 mm).
3 When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key:

Select each side in turn and set the frame erase
m
width using the [-I or [+I key, and press the [OK]
key.

@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame
1 Place your originals and press the [Special Heady t o COPY.
Features] key.
3 Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press

the [Next] key.
4 Select the size of the book when opened, and
@ NOTE
To select A or B series paper size, press the [AB-
size] key.
5 Press each key ("Top", "Left", "Center",

"Right", and "Bottom") and set the desired
K
0 book frame erase width using the [-I or [+I key,
.-
+
0 and press the [OK] key.
G
2
LL The values set here are specified independently
z
0
around the original. To set a value uniformly
0
- around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once]
3
+ key.
(U
3 @ NOTE
m When entering values in millimeters, you can use
control panel.
Even when you enter the values with the Numeric
keys (a -@), you can change the values using the
[-I or [+] key.
[mm] key.
The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for "Center"
and 1/8"(4 mm) for "Top'; "Left", "Right"and "Bot-
tom".
When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key: [ b o k Frame Erase1 Speclfy the frame erase width.
Set the desired book frame erase width using
the [-I or [+I key, and press the [OK] key.
,
Adjust
Each Dim.
-

@ NOTE C
4
", I
a To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel keys in that order.
.-
0
C
0
=I
1
LL I
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc.
1 Place your originals on the platen glass and

Systeln Monitor
V)
K
.-0
C
0
K
3
LL
3 Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the

[Next] key.
4 Specify the binding erase feature, and press [Binding Erase1 Select a Binding Erase feature.
the [Next] key.
NOTE
t The position of the binding holes refers not to the
position in which the original is placed on the platen
glass, but to the position of the binding holes
viewed when the surface of the original that you
want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the
top.
5 Set the desired binding erase width using the
[-I or [+I key, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
the Numeric keys (@ - @) and the 5 key on the
control panel.
Even when you enter the values with the Numeric
keys (@ -@), you can change the values using the
H or [+] key.
[mm] key.
The default setting is 3/4" (18 mm).

- --
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the 2 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
,I -,L,;:- 'I
.
/&$~~~;~>$.
. ;,: .
=
,:aL<-,s, . . . . Eight Originals to Fit on a
'"*SingleCopy Sheet (Image Combinalion)
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided originals, or the facing
pages of a book to fit on one side or both sides of a selected paper size.
0 IMPORTANT
In the lmage Combination mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/SheetInsertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, Dif-
ferent Size Originals, Image Separation, lmage Repeat, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be set.
Originals copied in the lmage Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the lmage
Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
@ NOTE
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit on the selected paper size.
2 O n l
Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.
Originals
4 O n 1
Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.
Originals COPY
3-30 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image
Combinalion)
3 Select the size of the originals, and press the
[Next] key.
@ NOTE
When copying the two-sided original with the
lmage Combination mode, press the [Z-Sided
Original] key after selecting the original size.
To select A or B series paper size, press the [NB-
size] key
When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:

Select the type of original, and press the [OK]
kev.
4 Select the desired lmage Combination feature,

and press the [Next] key.
@ NOTE
To make a two-sided copy, press the [Z-Sided
COPY]key.
When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key:

Select the type of two-sided orientation, and
press the [OK] key.
Combination)
8 O n 1
Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.
Originals COPY
Place your originals in the feeder and press

@ NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to "On'; the Collate mode
on p. 6-36.)
2 Press the [Image Combination] key.
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image 3-31
Combination)
When you select the [Option] key: ----
,..8-*.2.k..-" a....,-..
[Optionl Select the lmage order.
"" ,La".. m-%
.&
.;.:-
Select the image order, and press the [Done]

key.
system Monitor 41
2 On 1
4On1,8On1
system Monitor 41 -
-
3
a,
V)
3
5 Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.

screen.
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot set Automatic Paper Selection in the
lmage Combination mode.
@ NOTE
The machine automatically selects the copy ratio
depending on the selected paper size.

@ NOTE
When you set the lmage Combination mode, the
Shift mode is automatically set.
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image 3-33
Combination)
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and[Cancel] keys in that
order.
Mu can also cancel the mode by pressing the key (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Combination)
I lnto Equal Sections and Enlarging Each
Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
This mode automatically divides an original into equal sections and copies each section in enlarged
form on a separate sheet.
0 IMPORTANT
In the lmage Separation mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, lmage
Combination, and lmage Repeat modes cannot be set.
Originals copied in the lmage Separation mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Different
Size Originals mode in combination with the lmage Separation mode.
Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the lmage
Separation mode.
The following lmage Separation features are available: 1 to 2, 1 to 4,2-Sided11 to 2, and 2-Sided/ 1
to 4.
@ NOTE
The enlargement ratio is automatically set to match the designatedpaper size.
I t 0 2
Divides a one-sided original into two equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as
two 1-sided copies or one 2-sided copy.
Original COPY
@ NOTE
You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature. When placed vertically,
each page is divided into upper and lower sections.
Dividing an Original lnto Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a 3-35
Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
I t 0 4
Divides a one-sided original into four equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as
four 1-sided copies or two 2-sided copies.
Original COPY
L
.-0
C
3
@ NOTE
LL You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature.
a
S
-
3
C
1 Place your originals on the platen glass and
8
3
Cr)
System Monitor
2 Press the [Image Separation] key.
3-36 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a
Separate Copy Sheet (ImageSeparation)
3 Select the desired Image Separation feature,
and press the [Next] key.
@ NOTE
To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy]
key
When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key:

Select the appropriate orientation, and press
the [OK] key.
4 Select the layout for the last original, and [Image Separation] Select t h e layout f o r the last
m
press the [Next] key. original.
@ NOTE
You can reduce the output of pages without images
(blank output) by setting the layout of the last origi-
nal.
l ~ y s t e mMonitor 41
1 To 2
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a 3-37
When you select the [Option] key: r,--"* P ,.*a" P
"
,
..
"
& Ak- ,-,.-.. Ah- ,--A
[Option] Select the image order.
Specify the image (print) order, and press the
[Done] key.
system Monitor 41
1 To2
r ---- *-----*.--, c-,--. ...-

-,*,,.
0 4-- *h.. 0--*
[ O m on1 Select tne .nag0 order.
system Monitor 41
1 To4
rn
5 Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection in
the Image Separation mode.
@ NOTE
The machine automatically selects the copy ratio
depending on the selected paper size.

3-38 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a
@ NOTE
When there are multiple originals, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the -@
key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a 3-39
Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
-- --.--------.A
> i
!$$;6,'c, ?F'7, ,
Different-size Originals Together in the

Feeder (Different Size Originals)
This function enables you to copy different-size originals with the same width or different-size origi-
nals with different widths, together in one group.
0 IMPORTANT
In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Bookb2-sided, Two-page Separation, Book-
let, lmage Combination, lmage Separation, and lmage Repeat modes cannot be set.
All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).
Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals.
Set the different-size originals with the combinations as follows. Other combinations may damage the
originals.
- 11 'k17"and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR.
When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass,
and as a result, the images may be scanned and copied slantwise.
You cannot select the Shift mode when you set the Automatic Paper Selection in combination with the Dif-
ferent Size Originals mode.
You cannot set the Staple mode when placing different-width originals.
1 Place your original in the feeder and press the

[Special
- . Features]- key.
.
@
- NOTE
on p. 6-36.)
Systen Monitor
dl
2 Press the [Different Size Originals] key.
3-40 Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (DifferentSize Originals)

3 Select the type of the Different Size Originals,
screen.
# NOTE
When you set the same-width originals, press the
[Same Width] key
When you set the different-width originals, press
the [Different Width] key

4
# NOTE
press the ''"a key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (DifferentSize Originals) 3-41
- -
-.li-.-c--r--
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into mul-
tiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are cop-
ied as one document after all the batches have been scanned.
Originals Copies
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot change the copy settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the
necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original or the desired Finisher mode.
If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when
scanning is completed.
When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
@ NOTE
When you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the 1 b2-Sided mode before-
hand if the first batch of originals is one-sided. If the first batch is two-sided, set the 2 b2-Sided mode
beforehand.To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of
original.
It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot
prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See "Printing Multi-
ple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),"on p. 4-63.)
1 Place your first original and press the [Special I Heady toCOPY. I
Features] key.
System Monitor
41
3-42 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

2 Press the [Job Build] key.

The display returns to the Basic Features screen. V)
K
4
.-0
C
Start
4 Press the @ key to start scanning the orig-
inals.
# NOTE
You can adjust the Exposure and the lrnage Qual-
ity (See 'Adjusting Exposure and lrnage Quality
(Copy Exposure)," on p. 2-32.)
You can change the setting of the original type
(One-sided/ Two-sided). (See "Two-sided Copying
(Two-sided Mode)," on p. 2-38.)
You can change the number of copy sets. (See
"Entering the Copy Quantity," on p. 2-36.)
To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the
'"b key
When scanning Two-sided originals:
Press the [PSided] key.
0 IMPORTANT
Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Origi-
nal mode according to the type of originals.
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) 3-43
1 - -.- -2 I---. --.---

Select the type of two-sided original, and press
the [OK] key.
5 When scanning is completed, set the next

original.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the last original is

scanned, then press the [Done] key.
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features]
and [Job Build] keys in that order.
key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
3-44 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in
Memory (Mode Memory)
You can store any possible combination of the Copy functions, up to 9 settings, in a memory key,
and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the Copy functions used frequently.
@ NOTE
The copy jobs stored in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF
You can store al!functions (modes) except for the Interrupt mode.
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Job

1 Program the copy job that you want to store in
4~
the Basic Features or Special Features screen.
@ NOTE
In the display on the right, the Two-page Separation
and Margin modes are set.
2 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
3 Press the [StoreIErase] key.
Storing1Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-45

4 Press the [Store] key.
5 Select the desired memory key from among

U)
memory keys [MI] to [Mg], and press the
C
.-0 [Next] key.
C
0
C
3
LL
@ NOTE
The mode memory key where copy settings are
2
o already stored shows a small, black square [B] in
0
-
3
the lower right corner of the key
.c
a) If you selected a memory key to which a copy job
U) has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
3
If there are more stored copy modes than currently
C3 displayed, you can scroll the list using the [V] or
[A] keys.
If you selected a memory key to which a copy
job has not yet been stored:
The message to confirm whether or not you
want to store the new copy job is displayed.
W To store:
Select the [Yes] key. The new copy job is
stored to the memory key.
W To cancel storing:
Select the [No] key, then select another key.
3-46 Storing1Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)

If you selected a memory key to which a copy [Storel select the storage location.
job has already been stored: DO wu wish t o overwrite the prevlous setting?
The message to confirm that you want to
replace the old copy job settings with the new
copy job settings is displayed.
To overwrite:
Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the
memory key are replaced with the new copy
job.
System Monitor
To cancel storing:
Select the [No] key, then select another mem-
ory key.
When storing is completed, the message "Stored
in memory." appears for about two seconds.
6 When the copy settings are stored, the mem-

ory key storing the copy job is highlighted and
the stored settings are displayed.

screen.

l~ysternMonitor 41
Storing a Memory Key Name
1 Press the [Special Features] key. Ready t o COPY.

3 Press the [StorelErase] key.
4 Press the [Store Name] key.

4~
(3
5 Select the memory key ([MI] to [M9]) for which

you want to assign a name, and press the
[Next] key.
@ NOTE
The mode memory key where copy settings are
already stored shows a small, black square [W] in
the lower right corner of the key.
If you selected a memory key to which a copy job
has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
6 Enter the new name, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
For details on how to enter characters on the touch
panel display, see "Entering Characters on the
Touch Panel Display," on p. 10-6.
The maximum number of characters you can
assign for the name is 10.
If you press the [OK] key without any characters
entered, the name of the memory key will revert
back to its default setting, e.g. [MI] or [M2].
Storing1 Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-49
, 7 Press the [OK] key.
screen.
b
1
I
cn
c
.-
0
C
0
Recalling a Copy Job

1 Press the [Special Features] key. Heady t o COPY.

3 Select the memory key where the copy setting

you want to recall is stored.
cq
z
i
4 Check the copy settings stored to the memory

key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK]
key.
screen.
@ NOTE
Recalling a copy job from memory cancels the cur-
rent copy job.
After recalling a copy job from memory, you can
change its settings and make copies.
If you press another memory key, the copy job
stored in that key is recalled.


Erasing a Copy Job
1 Press the [Special Features] key. Ready t o copy.
.. .. . . . .... . . . . ... .. . .... . . . . .... ......................................
. ,.,... . .,... .
lsystern Monitor 41
cn
-
c
.n
c
0
3
I LL
3 Press the [StorelErase] key.
4 Press the [Erase] key.
3-52 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)
5 Select the memory key of the copy job that you
want to erase, and press the [Next] key.
0 IMPORTANT
* Check the copy settings before you erase them.
@ NOTE
* The mode memory key where copy settings are
already stored shows a small, black square [W] in
I
the lower right corner of the key
If you selected a memory key to which a copy job
4~
has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
If there are more stored copy modes than currently
displayed, you can scroll the list using the ['I] or
[ A ] keys. m
6 The message on the right appears to confirm

-
c
.-
0
o
c
3
that you want to erase the copy job. LL
Select the [Yes] key. 2
The stored copy job is erased. 8
-3
C
@ NOTE
3
a,
The name of the memory key is not erased. For

details on how to change the name, see "Storing a C*)
Memory Key Name," on p. 3-48.
If you want to cancel erasing, select the [No] key
The message "Erased." is displayed for about two

seconds on the touch panel display.
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-53
7 Press the [Cancel] key.
screen.
b
U)
c
.-
0
C
8 press the [Dane] key.
3-54 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)
You can recall up to three previously set copy jobs and make copies using these settings.
0 IMPORTANT
One copy job is defined by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom etc., and pressing the -@ or
key when the Auto Clear function is on, or by calling up a copy job stored in memory If one of these
keys was not pressed, or if the Auto Clear function is not active, calling up a copy job by pressing the
[Recall] key is not possible.
Once stored, the three copy jobs are held in memory even if the power is turned OFF:
The Standard mode is not stored.
Copy modes already stored is not stored.
1 Place your originals and press the [Special I Heady t o COPY. I c

v)
Features] key. .-5

C
I
U
C
12 ~
i
2
S
-I
-
3
!
1
3 !
m
2 Press the [Recall] key. I
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) 3-55

3 Select one of the [1 Before], [2 Before] or [3
Before] keys. Check that the copy settings are
correct, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
@ NOTE
* You can also check which copy jobs are stored to
memory other than the currently displayed copy job
by pressing the [V]or[A] key
~b
I-
!
In
c
0
c
I
I
3-56 Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)

Inverting Original Images (NegaRosi)
This function enables you to make copies of the original inverting the black and the white areas. I
Original
-
1 Place your originals and press the [Special
.-
C
0
c
~~
Features] key.
Z l
I
3
a,
3 i
I
I
Press the [V]key to display the Special Fea-
tures screen (212).
I
Inverting Original Images (NegaIPasi) 3-57
3 Press the [NegalPosi] key.
I
b
V)
c
i .=
0
0
~ 5 Proceed to make copies in the usual way.

i
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ V ] , and[Nega/Posi] keys in that order.
You can also cancel the mode by pressing the 2 key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
3-58 Inverting Original Images (NegalPosi)

with the Original lmage Repeated
(Image Repeat)
You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the lengthwise or widthwise direction.The
following two setting methods are available for the lmage Repeat mode.
Automatic setting
The original image is copied so that the maximum possible of copies fit in the selected paper size.
Original
CITY
Manual setting
The original image is copied for the specified number of times.
Original COPY
Example : When "3 times" is specified.

*Images overlap when copied.
0 IMPORTANT
In the lmage Repeat (manual setting) mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Bookb2-Sided, Two-
page Separation, Cover/SheetInsertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase,
Different Size Originals, lmage Combination, lmage Separation, and Mirror lmage modes cannot be set.
In the lmage Repeat (auto setting) mode, combined use with the Automatic Paper Selection and Auto
modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.
Making Copies with the Original lmage Repeated (ImageRepeat) 3-59

1 Place your originals and press the [Special
Features] key.
2 Press the [V]key to display the Special Fea-

V) tures screen (212).
C
.-
0
C
0
c
3
LL
2
8
-
3
C
a,
I 3 Press the [lmage Repeat] key.
4 Set the number of lmage repeat times for each

of the lengthwise and widthwise directions.
Automatic setting
Press the [Auto] key.
@ NOTE
To make repeated copies with the number of
repeats automatically set, select the paper size.
The original image is then copied so that the maxi-
mum possible number of copies fit in the selected
paper size.
3-60 Making Copies with the Original lmage Repeated (Image Repeat)
M a n u a l setting
Press the [-] or [+I key to set the number of
images.
@ NOTE
The number of times that the image can be set to
repeat is from 1 to 20.
Sometimes the designated image will overlap
depending on how many times you have manually
set it to be repeated.

screen (212).

~
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ V ] , [Image Repeat], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) 3-61
I This function copies images as if reflected in the mirror, reversing the right and left sides.
Original
B
p 0 IMPORTANT
In the Mirror lmage mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Margin, Frame
'
1 8 Erase, Image Combination, and lmage Repeat modes cannot be set.
1 Place the original and press the [Special Fea-

tures] key.
2 Press the [I key

] to display the Special Fea-
tures screen (212).
- - -
3-62 Making Copies with lmage Reversed (MirrorImage)

3 Press the [Mirror lmage] key.

4
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ V ] , and [Mirror Image] keys in that order.
Making Copies with lmage Reversed (MirrorImage) 3-63

.-.- -- ,. .., - - . .. I . , , . 7 .
jj$j<!ij; . . .. ,
, +<; .
~a king Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

'This mode allows you to make copies of original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or
softer. To make copies with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To make copies with
photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key.
Low
If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the
Photo mode, moire or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften
this moire effect so that the copy is easier on the eyes.
Original COPY
Low set Low not set
RESORT PLAN RESORT PLAN RESORT PLAN

The world's coral reefs, where The world's coral reefs, where The world's coral reefs, where
brilliantly colored fish and a brilliantly colored fish and a brilliantly colored flsh and a
myriad of other tropical creatures myriad of other tropical creatures myriad 01 other tropical creatures
High
This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more
sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals.
Original COPY
High set High not set
RESORT PLAN RESORT PLAN RESORT PLAN

The world's coral reefs, where The world's coral reefs, where Tne nor a s coro rppls v.ilPre
br~ll~antlvcolored llsh and a mvriad brilliantly colored fish and a myriad 01 1 3nl y co'oree Isn m e n mfr a0
ot ollisitrop~calcreatures conie 01 other IroDicalcreatures come 01 Olner trooca creat.res come
together. AP~IYnicknamed together. nicknamed
'Trap cat Forests under tne sea" "Trop~calForests under the sea''.
tnese spots 01 oreatnlak'ng beauty these spots of breallilaklng beauty
sowe as nome to co~nfless Sewe as home l o countless
varieties of life. andto usof the var el es of ~ f ean0 ro .s of ms varlefies of life, and to us of Ihe
a
land, 1111salluring. dream.llke land, t h i s a ~ l u & ~dreamlike
, land, uiis alluring. dream-like
world forms a tropical paradlse world forms a trooical Daradise world lornls a tropical paradlse
fliled wlth romance. filled with romance. Illled w~thromance
3-64 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

1 Place your originals and press the [Special I Heady t o COPY. 1
Features] key.
2 Press the [ V ] key to display the Special Fea-

tures screen (212). V)
C
.-
0
w
0
C
3
LL
2
S
-
-
3
a
V)
3
m
3 Press the [Sharpnesy key.
4 Use the [Low] or [High] key to adjust the

sharpness, and press the [OK] key.
screen (212).
@ NOTE
To copy text and lines clearly, the setting should be
towards "High". To copy photographs etc., the set-
ting should be towards "Low".
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-65

b 6 Proceed to make copies in the usual way.
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ V ] , [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
3-66 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

Using the Mail Box Functions
This chapter describes the Mail Box functions with which you can temporarily store data for later
printing.
Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

.
Storing Originals in the Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-2
.
Printing Documents Stored in the Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 .
Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-8
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Adjusting the Exposure and lmage Quality before Scanning the Originals
Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-13

.
(Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
. 4
cn
o
.-
c
Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 C
0
C
Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step 3
LL
(Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
.
Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 m
E
-
.-
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-29
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and r"
0,
Storing it (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 5
Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder cn
c
.-
(Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
. 3
cn
Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Inverting Original Images (NegalPosi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 d
Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-49
Collating Prints (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
..
Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55 .
Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets
(CovertJob Separator). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
.
Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents). . . . . . . . . . . .4-63
Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print). . . . . . . . . 4-65
Checking the Document's Detailed Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Changing the Name of a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-68
MovingaDocument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4-72
.
This section describes the flow of basic Mail Box operations dividing it in two parts; Scanning origi-
nals and Printing.
@ NOTE
For details on the following items, see the indicated pages.
- Main Power and Control Panel Power (Seep. 1-6.)
- Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.)
- Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)
~ Storing Originals in the Box

The operation is the same as when making copies. First, place the originals you want to store in the
feeder or on the platen glass, then set the desired modes. When the machine is used as a network
printer, you can store data into the box from a computer.
L
.-
0
1
C
0
c Press the key.
2 Select the desired box number. Remaining Memory: i ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' i lnnx I
@ NO-rE
When the desired box is not displayed, press the
[ V ] or [ A ] key
When you enter the box number using the Numeric
(@-a),
U I
keys press the [OK] key after entering the 03!BOX ............................................ O X ..........
box number. E E l OOBOXe!
If a box is set with a password, a locked mark[fi] is lo. 0.?X05.............................................. O %........
displayed next to that box icon.
If a document is stored in a box, that box is dis-
played with the [ A ] icon.
4-2 Flow of Mail Box Operations

3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key. Remaining Memory: i
.. ...... .........
' ' ' ' ' ' . . ' i 100%
@ NOTE J
Enter the password used when the box was stored. he password using t h 3
17
(See "Setting/ Storing the Box," on p. 6-45.) If a
password has not been stored, this operation is not
necessary:
4 Press the [Scan] key.

a [ 00 BOX00 1 Total 0
I fl Document Name I Set Time I 1
El
I/ 1
El U)
C
........ .
.-0
..... ...." . . ~
:::::.::*!>:?
~
C
0
K
3
LL
m
3
-
.-
2
5 Place your originals.
5
a,
(See "Placing Originals," on p. 1 -1 1.) .-

K
o)
3
u
6 specify the scanning mode.
@ NOTE
You can set various modes when scanning the
original as when making copies.
Flow of Mail Box Operations 4-3
I I - I...----.' -r__i,.--ur . =- .
7 Press the 'lab
key.
When scanning is completed, the display returns
to the screen in step 4.
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot change the settings such as the scan-
ning quantity and scanning paper size during scan-
ning.
@ NOTE
When you want to stop scanning, press the
[Cancell key or the " " i key
When the screen on the right appears:

Press the -@ key once for each original. When
scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
@ NO-rE
You can change the setting of the Two-sided/
One-sided modes, Image Quality and Scanning
Exposure.
H E n s 2 scan.. . system Monitor
8 When scanning is completed, the scanned

data is stored in the selected box.
@ NOTE
The stored document is automatically stored with
the name of "year, month, date and time". For
example, when the data was scanned at 1:35(PM),
41 seconds, on August 12,2000, its name is
'20000812133541 ".
You can also change the name of the stored
data. (See "Changing the Name of a Document,"
on p. 4-68.)
The stored data is deleted after 3 days. This can be
changed between "no limit" and 30 days. (See "Set-
ting/ Storing the Box,"on p. 6-45.)

Printing Documents Stored in the Box
You can print documents stored in a box from this machine. When the machine is used as a network
printer, you can also specify printing from the computer. For details on how to operate the machine
from personal computers, see the Remote UI User's Guide.
@ NOTE
You can select and print up to 32 documents in one box at a time. When you merge documents, you can
select and print up to 100 documents. However, when there are reserved jobs in the box, the number you
can select and print varies depending on the number of documents in the reserved jobs.
You can only select multiple documents when those documents are stored in the same box. To
print multiple documents stored in different boxes, you need to move the documents to one of the
boxes beforehand. (See "Moving a Document,"on p. 4-70.)
When documents are printed without changing the settings, the documents sent from computers
are printed with the settings set from the computers, and the documents scanned into memory are
printed with the standard iocal Print settings. (See 'Setting a Standard Mode for Local ~rintinb,"on
p. 6-21.)
1 Press the key.
2 Press the desired box number. Remaining Memory:

i ' ' ' ' . ' . .
-1
'
96% I
@ NOTE
When the desired box is not displayed, press the
[r]or[A] key
When entering the box number using the Numeric
keys (@ -a), press the [OK] key after entering the
box number.
If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [Elis
displayed next to that box icon.
If a document is stored in a box, that box is dis-
played with the [PIicon.

3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
Enter the password using the
Enter the password used when the box was stored.
(See "Setting/Storingthe Box,"on p. 6-45.) If a
password has not been stored, this operation is not
necessary.
4 Select the document you want to print. & [ 00 sox00 1 Total 3
@ NOTE
When there are more than 4 stored documents,
press the [V]or [ A ] key to display the other docu- .... .....,.,,.,,,..,..,
ments.
You can select multiple documents stored in the
box.
The selected documents are numbered in the order
specified, and are printed in the order numbered.
I"-
• When you press the [Select All] key, you can select
system Monitor
all documents in the box (The key changes to the

[Clear Selection] key).
You can cancel the selection by pressing the docu-
ment again.
When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can
cancel all selection of the documents (The key
changes to the [Select All] key).
3 Press the [Print] key. )I & [ 00 BOXOO I rntill n I
System Monitor

6 press the [start print] key. Documents selected: 1
If there is a current job or a previously reserved

job, the machine will start printing after that job is
completed.
@ NOTE
You can enter the printing quantity using the
Numeric keys (@ -a).
If you make a mistake entering the quantity, press
the 8 key and enter the correct quantity
I 1 1
I
When you press the [Sample Print] key, one print is When you select one document.
made for you to confirm the printing output or the
settings and the image data of the stored docu-
Documents selected: 2 Change P
ment. (See "Checking the Print Result or the Image ;. Settlngs
...................................................................................................................
of the Stored Document (Sample Print),"on p. 4-65.) 41'Erase
"" &
When you press the [Change P Settings] key, you 1
can change each print setting. (See "Printing a
Document in a Box after Changing the Settings,"on
p. 4-49.)
When you press the [Print & Erase] key, you can
delete the printed data.
When you select multiple documents and press the
[Change The Copies] key, you can change the System Monitor 5
number of prints. -
.-
When you select multiple documents.
You can change the exposure or cancel the printing
during printing.(See Chapter 5 "Printing Effi-
3
ciently".)
When printing starts, the screen on the right e"""",. , ' ' ' ' - ' ' ' '
^Ej..."
appears. i..;, 0005: (P I ) Printing ... I
@ NOTE
To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key (You
cannot cancel printing by pressing the ""@ key)
To reserve the next print, press the [Done] key and
begin by selecting the box in which the desired
document is stored. (See "Reserving a Box Print
while Printing (Reserve Print),"on p. 5-9.) 0005 20000412183250 System Monitor
Printing ...
When printing is completed, the display returns to
the Box selection screen.
1 I - - I .
. -.....-I..-
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select)
You can select the document size when scanning transparencies, or especially when specifying the
document size before scanning.
# NOTE
The default setting is 'fluto".
1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below.
@ I) Select the desired box number I)[SCB"d I)Place the original
# NOTE
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.
2 Press the [Doc. Size Select] key.
System Monitor
3 Select the document size, and press the [Document Size Select1 Select the document size.
[Done] key.
0 IMPORTANT
In the Automatic Document Size Selection mode,
combined use with the Booklet Scanning, Original
Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Com-
bination modes cannot be set.
a
i
.....................................................
A/B-slze
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .................... ,
...,..,.,,..,,.,,.,,,., ,,,,.,,,,,, ,
You cannot select the [Auto] key when scanning the Done
following type of originals. Specify the size of the
document manually.
- Non-standard size originals
- Highly transparent originals such as transparen-
cies
- Originals smaller than STMT in size
# NOTE
To select A or B series paper size, press the
[AB-size] key.
4-8 Scanning Originals into a Box

4 Start scanning the original.
(See "Storing Originals in the Box," on p. 4-2.)
@ NOTE
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning
mode.)
When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.
Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning

the Originals (Scanning Exposure)
Manual Adjustment of the Scanninfl Exposure
You can manually adjust the scanning exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
V)
C
1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below. .-c
0
U
I) Select the desired box numberI) Place the original
C
3
LL
NOTE m8
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. -
.-
2
2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key.
@ NOTE

@ NOTE
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning
mode.)
When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Scanning Originals into a Box 4-9

Selectin@Image Qualify
You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The
following three modes are available for adjusting image quality.
Text mode
This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be
scanned clearly.
Text/Photo mode
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos.
Photo mode
This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals
containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos).
0 IMPORTANT
- If you scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moire
may occur. If this happens, you can soften this morie effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Scan-
ning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness),"onp. 4-47.)
Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set
mode is canceled.
@ NOTE
When you have selected the Text, Text/Photoor Photo mode, the scanning exposure can be adjusted only
by Manual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be set.
When the "Photo Mode" of Mail Box Settings is set to "On'; you can select printed image or photo after
pressing the [fl] key. (See "Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function,"on p. 6-50.)
If the original is a transparency,select the Text, TextIPhoto or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the
most appropriate level.
1 Prepare to scan the original into the box with the procedure below.
I) Select the desired box number I) 7 4 II)Place the original
@ NOTE
2 Press the [Dl key. Ready t a scan.
mmaboam
[Cancel] a Initial Settings
System Monitor
a
4-10 Scanning Originals into a Box

3 Select the type of your original (Text,
TextlPhoto, Photo).
When the "Photo Mode" of Mail Box Settings is set

to "On", you can select the [Printed Img.] or
[Photo] key. (See "Setting the Photo Mode of the
Mail Box Function," on p. 6-50.)
4 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the

scanning exposure.
@ NOTE
Move the indicator above the [Light] and[Dark]
keys to the lefi to make the exposure lighter or to

@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [A] key.
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning
mode.)
When you press the keey, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Scanning Originals into a Box 4-11

Press the [Start Print] key. Documents selected: 2 !a
,
ji
Original
Settings

....................................................................................................
5! LTR 0
Put0
1
;a ........................
Prlnt 8
Erase
job, the machine will start printing after that job is 1-
completed.
(See "Printing Documents Stored in the Box," on
p. 4-5.) Merge
v ai
Documents : Initial Settings
@ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Cover/Job Separa-
...............................................................................
[Cancel] -I System Monitor
a
tor] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]
key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of
the Local Printing.)
When you press the keg the display returns to
Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-59
--
I
- -- pp
- h
Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)
You can make prints which can easily be made into a booklet.
0 IMPORTANT
In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Collate, Two-sided Printing, and Cover/JobSeparator modes
cannot be set.
You cannot set the Booklet mode for a record size other than LTW STMS:
Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
@ NOTE
When you want to print document for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the original with the
Booklet Scanning mode beforehand. (See 'Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning),"
on p. 4-27.)
1 Specify the desired document with procedure below.

select the desired box number, then the desired document (P'"f
@
- NOTE
V)
c
L Z 2 Press the [Change P Settings] key.
3 Press the [Booklet] key.
@ NOTE
When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu-
ment recorded from a personal computer returns to
the former settings set from the computer, and the
scanned document returns to the standard mode of
the Local Printing.
4-60 Printing a Document in a Box after Changing the Settings

Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when
0 IMPORTANT Stack Bypasss

The paper used for the cover page must be the
same size as the other pages.
The paper used for the main text must be from
17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/n? to 80 g/m?).
The paper used for the cover page must not be
heavier than 110-lb index (200 dm?).
System Monitor
41
You cannot print on the coverpages.
When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot
set the paper used for the main text in the stack
bypass.
@ NOTE
To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key.
Insert the paper for the cover page in the stack
bypass.
11 '217"/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.
When you select the [Add Cover] key: [Bookletl Select the Paper Type tar the Cover.
Select the type of paper, and press the [Next]
key.
Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when
System Monitor
I
--
-.-L-"--.-
5 Select whether or not to saddle stitch the [Bookletl Select whether or not t o saddle s t l t c h
booklet, and press the [OK] key. the booklet.(Up t o 15 sheets can be stapled.)
0 IMPORTANT .....
//:I/../
The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad-

dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
When the number of sheets exceeds 15, the sta-
pling will not be performed, and the sheets will be
output to the output tray
@ NOTE System Monitor
The available number of output sets in the saddle

stitching is as follows:
- Number of sheets Number of sets
1- 5 25 sets
6-10 15 sets
11-15 10 sets
Saddle Stitching will not be performed when there
is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
.--
C
0
c
-3
6 Press the [Start Print] key.
LL
::
rn job, the machine will start printing after that job,is
-
.- completed.
9
a,
5 p. 4-5.)
0)
c
.-
3 @ NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Booklet] and [Can-
* cel] keys in that order.
key (The machine returns to the standard mode of
When you press the keey, the display returns to
the Box selection screen

Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge
Documents)
You can print multiple documents, such as scanned documents and documents sent from a
computer etc. as one document. This mode enables you to combine documents with different
settings as one document, so it is useful when you want to print documents as the following:
- When printing and stapling data created with different softwares, or data made by multiple people
as one document.
- When printing paste-up or transparency originals and data sent from a computer as one document
with the Booklet mode set.
0 IMPORTANT
You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents.
When you use this function to combine the documents, the settings for each document are cleared, and
prints are made with the Standard mode settings. When printing is completed, the settings of each docu-
ment return to the settings set when stored.
You can change the settings of the Standard mode. (see "Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing,"on
p. 6-21.)
1 Speciiy the desired box with procedure below.

r)Select the desired box number
@ NOTE
2 Spefify the documents in the order to be

merged, and press the [Print] key.
@ NOTE
The selected documents are numbered in the order
specified.
When you press the [Select All] key, you can select
all documents in the box (The key changes to the
[Clear Selection] key).
You can cancel the selection by pressing the docu-
ment again.
When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can
cancel all selection of the documents (The key
changes to the [Select All] key).

3 Press the [Change P Settings] key.
4 Press the [Merge Documents] key.

completed.
p. 4-5.)
@ NOTE
The name of the printed document is displayed as
'TName of first document] + [Number of other docu-
ments] documents". For example, if the name of
the document specified first is [First] and three
other documents were specified, [First + 3 docu-
ments] will be displayed.
key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of
When you press the key, the display returns to

rint Result or the Image of the
Stored Document (Sample print)
You can print one set of print output when you want to check the image before printing, or when you
want to check the settings and the image data of the document stored in the box.
0 IMPORTANT
The [Sample Print] key only appears when you set the Collate or Staple mode. This key does not appear
when the Group mode is set. In addition, when you select multiple documents, this key does not appear
unless you set the Merge Documents mode.
@ NOTE
You can make a sample print even when the number of print sets is one.
1
*
Specify the desired document with procedure below.
Select the desired box number, then the desired document I)
@ NOTE
2 Press the [Sample Print] key, and press the

[Start Print] key.
Sample set printing starts and one print set is
made.
@ NOTE
The number of print is not changed even when the
sample set is made.
3 Check the printed paper, and press the [Start

Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key.
Make the remaining prints?
@ NOTE
(If YOU want t o make new settings,
select Change Settings.)
To output the prints, press the [Start Print] key
To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key
To change the settings, press the [Change Set-
tings] key
Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample 4-65
Print)
When you select the [Change Settings] key:
Change the desired settings, then press the
[Done] key. 1,
Documents selected: 1
@ NOTE
When you made a sample print without changing
the settings, press the [Change P Settings] key,
then change the settings.
key (The machine returns to the standard mode of
When selecting one document and

printing without changing the settings
When selecting one document and

printing after changing the settings
When selecting multiple documents

and printing after changing the settings
4 Press the [Start Print] key. ..... "........... " ' " " ' .
-6%
If there is a current job or a previously reserved Make the re~ainingprints?
job, the machine will start printing after that job is (If you want t o make new settlngs,
select Change Settmgs.)
completed.
(See "Printing Documents Stored in the Box,"on p. 4-5.)
@ NOTE
When you want to check the changed settings,
press the [Sample Print] key again.
system Monitor
4-66 Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print)
Checking the Document's Detailed lnformation
You can check the detailed information of documents stored in the box.

Select the desired box number Select the desired document
@ NOTE
When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high-
lighted) document are displayed.
2 Press the [Details] key.
3 Check the detailed information, and press the

0)
.-
C
[Done] key. 3
Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears Tr
again.
.User Name. D
.Pages DI
.Copies D1
Checking the Document's Detailed lnformation 4-67

ame of a Document
You can change the name of a document stored in the box.

e)Select the desired box number e)Select the desired document
@ NOTE
When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high-
lighted) document are displayed.
2 Press the [Details] key.
3 '
Press the [Change document name] key.

-
I[Details]
~ o Number
b
I S e t Time
D 0004
v04/12 2000 20:ll
*Document Typev Scan doc.
.Document NameV20000412201114
mUser Name v
.pages DI
mCop~es DI
mSlze D LTR 0
4-68 Changing the Name of a Document

4 Enter the document name that you want to
change, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see
"Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,"
on p. 10-6.
assign for a name is 24.
You cannot store a document without a name.
If you want to cancel storing, press the [Cancel]
key.
5 Press the [Done] key. [Details]

m Job Number DO004
Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears
mSet Time D04/12 2000 20:11
again. .Document TypeD scan doc.
mDocument NameD Important
mUser Name D
.Pages DI
.Copies DI
m Size D LTR
.............. .. .. ..... .......... . ... . . . ... .,. .......... .......
D] Change document
name [ i ] ,
Changing the Name of a Document 4-69

You can move a desired document to a different box.
@
*
NOTE
Select the desired box number *
Select the desired document
If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear
Selection] key).
2 Press the [Move Document] key. & [ 00 BOX00 1 lotat 4

[dI Document Name I Set Time I I
3 Specify the box to which you want to move the

document.
@ NOTE
You cannot move a document to multiple boxes.
4-70 Moving a Document

4 Press the [Start] key.
The screen on the right appears.
@ NOTE
If a document cannot be moved to the desired box,
a message telling you that you cannot move the
document will be displayed.
If a document cannot be moved, it will remain in the
original box.
If an error occurs while moving multiple documents,
the number of documents which have been moved
is displayed.

The display returns to the Box selection screen.
1 System Monitor
- -
Moving a Document 4-71

1
.. .
You can erase a document stored in a box.
# NOTE
Select the desired box number Select the desired document
If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear
Selection] key).
2 Press the [Erase] key.
3 Check the document, and press the [Yes] key. $ r 00 BOXOO

..........................................................
1 Total4
" ........
@ NOTE
If you do not want to erase the document, press the is it OK t o erase the selected I
document from the box?
[No] key.

Q LOO BOXOO 1 rota1 3
The display returns to the Box selection screen. 1 4I Document Name 1 Set Time I I
@ 20000412200831 04/12 20:08
........
System Monitor
4-72 Erasing a Document from a Box

Printing Efficiently
This chapter describes operations to make print jobs more efficient.
Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

.
Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (InterruptMode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5-5
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start). . . . . . . . 5-5
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is
Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5-6
.
Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
.
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs
Checking and Changing Printing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
-w
-
)I
..
K
.-
o
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 E
Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5-15. w
0
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5-16
. .-K
C
Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5-18 .-
K
Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 . l?
Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 . V)

Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 .
You can change the copy or print exposure during printing.
1 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key on the right

screen which appears during printing.
The printing exposure is changed.
@ NO-rE
In the Copy function
d " . . ' " " . ' . .

..;:I
. ...0001 : (P ...
I ) Printing
0001 20000606094233
Printing ...
In the Mail Box function
When printing is completed, the display returns to

the Basic Features screen if the last used function
was the Copy function, or to the Box selection
screen if it was the Mail Box function.
@ NOTE
Adjusting the exposure after printing has started
will produce a different result from the result before
scanning the original.
5-2 Changing the Exposure During Printing

ng the Current Job to Make Priority
Copies (Interrupt Mode)
The lnterrupt mode enables you to interrupt the reserved or current job long enough to make other
priority copies. This mode is useful when making a rush copy during a long copy job.
0 IMPORTANT
When making interrupt copy while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, make copies
without exchanging the control cards.
@ NOTE
You can make interrupt copies if the machine is ready to scan.
You can set the modes for the lnterrupt copy even while an original is being scanned into memory or into
a box.
1 Press the Ing key.

The '"8key remains constantly lit.
@ NOTE Addecdal Fundons
When you want to copy after changing the 0 00

lnlerrupt
Department ID while the Department ID Man-
agement is enabled, press the @ key and
enter the Department ID and Password. (See
"Entering the Department ID and Password,"
on p. 10-4.)
Even when you press the "5key, the job currently
being output will not be interrupted until the inter-
rupt copy starts.
2 Place your original, then set the necessary Heady t o perform lnterrupt job.
....................... ........, .................. ..................,....... ........... ............. .. .. ...-..... .......
copy mode.
@ NOTE
You can cancel the lnterrupt mode by pressing the
rnl.?"l
@ key
You can cancel only the copy mode by pressing the
key (The lnterrupt mode will not be can can-
celed.)
Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies [Interrupt Mode) 5-3
I ,- - - >
.-.--
3 Press the
Start
@ key.
When the Interrupt copy job starts, the 'vkey
stops flashing.
4 Once the original is scanned, remove it from

the machine.
0 IMPORTANT
When the interrupt copy job is completed, the inter-
rupted printing operation restarts.
If you want to continue the interrupt copy, wait until
the current interrupt copy job is completed (end of
printing).
5-4 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (InterruptMode)

Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up
Even while the machine is warming up, an original can be scanned, or you can make print settings.
0 IMPORTANT
If you scan originals while the machine is warming up, the time for the machine to warm up will be longer.
@ NOTE
Jobs can be reserved during the following status:
- While the machine is warrning up.
- While the machine returns from each energy-saving status.
- While the machine is warrning up after a maintenance, inspection, or troubleshooting job.
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming

Up (Auto Start)
1 Place your originals and select the desired

copy mode. -
-
z-s
.-(U
K
@ NOTE U
While the machine is warming up, you can reserve E
W
up to five copy jobs including the currently scan-
ning original. However, an interrupt copy job is not
counted.
-
.-K
.-
K
01
?f
You can set a different mode for each job.
V)
2 Press the 'IaGkey.

The message "Scanning ..."appears on the display.
A display shown on the right appears on the touch
panel display, depending on the copy mode.
To scan the next original, press the "@ key again.
When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
@ NO-rE
To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key on the
touch panel display or the key
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up 5-5
b- -..--.,..&.",-.--
3 After the machine has finished warming up, printing starts.
# NOTE
If warm up ends while scanning is still in progress, printing starts at that point.
You can change the exposure during printing. (See "Changing the Exposure During Printing," on p. 5-2.)
..
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while
the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print)
1 Specify the desired document with the procedure below.
Select the desired box number, thenthe desired document.
# NOTE
2 TO print without changing the settings, press

the [Start Print] key. If you want to change set- ................................................................................................... ..........................................
-
:
X
+
c tings before making a print, press the [Change
a
.- P Settings] key and set the desired mode, then
0
E press the [Start Print] key.
W
-
CI)
.-
C
.-
c
# NOTE
To make a sample print, press the [Sample Print]
I .............................................................................................
1
& key. (See "Checking the Print Result or the Image
V) of the Stored Document (Sample Print),"on p. 4-65.)
To erase the data afterprinting, press the [Print and
Erase] key.
To print after changing the settings, see "Printing
a Document in a Box after Changing the Set-
tings," on p. 4-49.
5-6 Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up

Reserving the Next Job during Printing
While the machine is printing, you can scan other originals or make print settings. You can print the
reserved job as soon as the current job is completed, so that you can reduce the time and effort
needed to scan the originals.
@ NOTE
You can reserve up to five copy jobs for the Copy function including the current job. For the Mail Box func-
tion, you can reserve up to 32 documents regardless of the number of reserved jobs. However, interrupt
- copy jobs are not counted.

You can set a different mode for each job.
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy)

0 IMPORTANT
When reserving a copy job while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, do not remove
that control card after that job is completed. If you remove the control card during printing, the job reserva-
tion will be canceled.
1 Press the [Done] key on the right screen which

appears during printing.
@ NOTE
If the job displayed in the touch panel is the job of
functions other than the Copy function, press the
key to display the Basic Features screen.
2 Place your originals on the platen glass or in

the feeder and set the desired copy mode.
Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-7

3 Press the
Sfad
@ key and start scanning origi-
nals.
0
8
8
@ NO-rE
If the screen on the right appears, press the [OK]
key and repeat the operation after the current job is
completed.
A No further reservations can be
made. Walt until the current job
is complete, then t r y again.
5-8 Reserving the Next Job during-Printing

Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print)
@ NOTE
* If the job displayed in the job monitor is the job of
functions other than the Mail Box function, press
the key to display the Box selection screen.
0003 20000417114357 System Monitor

...
2 Specify the desired document with the procedure below.

Select the desired box number, then the desired document I) 7 4
# NOTE
If the Box selection screen appears after step 1, specify the desired box number.
To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key If you want to change settings before 2
K
making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode. .-(I)
Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-9

Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs
When paper is fed from the stack bypass for the current print job or for a reserved job, you can des-
ignate the paper to be placed in the stack bypass for the next reserved job.
1 Press the [StackBypass Setting] key on the

Paper Selection screen that appears when set-
ting reserved print settings.
When there is no reserved print job, you can
designate the paper size by pulling it out and re-
inserting it.
2 Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.
-
-
%
K
a
.-
@ NOTE
To select A or 6 series paper size, press the [AB-
o size] key
E
W
-
.-F'
.-
K
a'
3 Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.
5-10 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs

The paper sizes previously set and the last set are
Paper size loaded
displayed as shown in the screen on the right. presently

Finish the reserved print settings.
5 Press the 'IaGkey. V)
@ NOTE
When reserving jobs of the Mail Box function, press
the [Start Print] key
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs 5-11

6 Set the specified paper when its turn comes to
print.
@ NOTE
The specified paper size is displayed when its turn
comes to print.
@ NOTE
To select A or B series paper size, press the [AIB-
size] key.
-
-
X
C
.-w
0
E
W
8
-a
.-(I:
.-(I:
Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.
The machine starts printing.
k
5-12 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs

Checking and Changing Printing Status
You can check and change the printing status (Stand-by, Printing, etc.) using the System Monitor
screen.
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents

1 Press the [System Monitor] key. Heservatlon copies can be made. I
............................................................................. - .........................................................
2 Select the [Copy] or [Print] key.
@ NOTE
When checking the print status for copy jobs, press
the [Copy] key.
When checking the print status for all jobs, press
. . . . . . . . . . .
the [Print] key
..................................................................................................................................
El M 11x11D ; .Recovery Steps
w LTR H LGL D i
B ta LTR H LTR 0 :
-
3 Select the [Status] key.
Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-13
. - -- +
-L-
-
4 Select the document you want to check the
detailed information for and press the [Details]
key.
.
NOTE
The status of each icon displayed in the screen are
as follows:
a
:Operating
:Waiting
@: Error
11 :Paused
# :Canceling
8 :Secured job
0 :Copy job
0 :Mail Box job
Q : Printer job
El : Report job
5 Check the detailed information, and press the

[Done] key. .Job Number DO404
.Set Time D04/17 2000 14:08
Repeating this operation returns the display
. . to the .Department ID D -------
Basic ~eaturesscreen. .Jab Type D a Copy
mDacument Name D
user Name D
sheet x copy D fl 1 x @ 1/ 9
.................................................................................
V) Details of a Copy document
JObNumber DO005
D04/17 2000 14:09
Department ID D
Job Type D&Box
Document Name DEOX P r i n t
User Name D BOX User
Page x Copy D I1 x @ 3
DWaiting t o print ...
...............................................................................................................
Details of a Box document
5-14 Checking and Changing Printing Status

Canceling Printing
1 Press the [System Monitor] key. Reservation copies can be maae.
2 Select the [Copy] or [Print] key.
# NOTE
When checking the print status for copy jobs, press
the [Copy] key
When checking the print status for all jobs, press
the [Print] key.
1 .- . . . . . . . . . . . -
................................................................................................................................................
IA 11X17 D i ~ R ~ C O Vsteps ~ ~ Y I
.-
C
.-
K
3 Select the [Status] key. L
4 Select the document to be canceled, and press

the [Cancel] key.
# NOTE
You cannot select multiple documents and cancel
them all in one action.

5 Press the [Yes] key.
@' NOTE
To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key. IS it OK t o cancel?
. . as "NG"on
The canceled document is disolaved
the Print Log screen.

Repeating this operation returns the display to the
..,-@
.-
c= Priority Printing
&
@' NOTE
V) When you set the priority printing, the machine starts printing it after the currently printing document is
completed.
1 Press the [System Monitor] key. Reservation coples can be made.

2 Press the [Print] key.
..............................................................................................................................
El k~ 11x17 0 / nfletovery Steps


Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer
You can temporarily stop the print job sent from a computer, or skip an error when a print error
occurs.
1 Press the [System Monitor] key. Ready t o COPY.
~b Press the [Print] key.
V)

4 Select the desired document, and press the
[Details] key.
HPrinting
0003 Printer
...
5 Press the [V]key.

[Details]
Perform operations of the print job. rn Job Number DO003
II II
.set Time D04/05 2000 19:25
When you finish operating the document, press .Department ID D-------
the [Done] key. .Job Type )&Printer

mDocument Name DPDL P r i n t
.User Name DPDL user
.paw DB 1/5
@ NOTE
When you press the [Pause] key, printing stops
temporarily, and the key changes to the [Resume]
key. When you press the [Resume] key, printing
restarts.
You can continue the print job even when a print
error occurred, by pressing the [Auto Continue] key,
depending on the type of error. However, the print
output may not be the same as expected. Ill .................................................................................................. Ill
When printing is canceled from the computer or
when the data is less than the volume of one page,
that job may not be correctly performed. When you
press the [Form Feed] key, you can force the print
data remaining in memory to be output.


Printing Secured Documents
You can print documents with a password sent from a computer. Documents with a password are
called secured documents.
Secured documents waiting to be printed are displayed with a B mark at the left of the job number.
To print these documents, you need to enter a password, which prevents other people who do not
know the password from observing the contents.
0 IMPORTANT
If the main power is turned OFF; the secured documents are erased.
The secured document will be erased after the printing is completed.
You cannot change the settings of the secured document.
-
1 Press the [System Monitor] key. Ready t o copy.
UJ
m
.-C
C
.-c
k
Ii:LTR D
EI M 11x17
nmLGL
i
ui
.Recovery Steps
I

4 Select the desired secured document, and
press the [Secured Print] key.
5 Enter a password, and press the [OK] key.

completed.
0 IMPORTANT
Enter the same password set in the operation from
the computer. The machine becomes ready to print
the document.
5 NOTE
To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key
- - - -

Checking the Printing History
1 Press the [System Monitor] key. Ready t o copy.

.........................................................................................................................
I [\System Monitor (J
. . . . . . . . . . .
........................................................................................................................
EI a I I X II m~ecovery
~ U Steps
a LTR 0 EI EI LGL U ;
.-
C
b 3 Press the [Log] key.
V)
4 Press the [Job Type] key.
I 5-22 Checking and Changing Printing Status

I
5 Select the type of job that you want to check i
the log.
@ NOTE
The [Printer] key is displayed only when the net-
work printer function is enabled.
6 After checking the printing job history, press

the [Done] key.
@ NOTE
When the document has been printed correctly,
"0K"is shown. "NG"is shown for documents of
which printing has been canceled.
In the Log, the printing job history of up to 40 docu-
ments can be displayed.
When you select the [Details] key:

The screen on the right appears.
Check the detailed information, and press the
[Done] key.
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen
appears again.

Checking the Device Status
You can check the amount of paper remaining in each paper drawer, the remaining memory
available, the location of a paper jam, and so on.
I
1 Press the [System Monitor] key.
I Reservation copies can De made.
I
2 Select the [Device] key.
..................................................................................................................................
E! ~ 1 1 x 1 7i 0m~ecoverySteps
V)
3 After checking the device status, press the
[Done] key.
@ NOTE
The [Paper Jams], [Staple Loading], [Staple Jams],
[Adding Toner] or [Punch Waste] key appears
below the "Recovery Steps", depending on each
status. When you press each key, the display
shows how to remove the jammedpaper, how to
add toner, etc.

Setting and Adjusting Common
Settings to Suit Your Needs
This chapter describes the initial settings and how to change them to suit your needs. I
I
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, .lob Done Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Settinglnchlnput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
.
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection1 Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . 6-10
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing
Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Setting the TimeThat the Unit's Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the
Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
.
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustmentlcleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original lmage and Print lmage
Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
.
Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Setting Standard Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Setting lmage Orientation Priority to On/ Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Setting the ,lob Duration Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
1 6. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs
Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-40

Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
.
Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settirlgs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-44
.
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-45
Setting1 Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-45 .
Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-48
.
Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50 .
Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51 .
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-54
Setting1Changing the System Manager ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-54
Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57 .
Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-69
.
Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
.
Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-71
.
Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-71
Addilional Functions Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in the Common Settings screen. (* indicates factory default
setting)
@ NOTE
In addition to the modes listed below, the [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], and [Remote UI On/Ov
modes are displayed when the network printer function is enabled.
For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function.
- [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.)
- [Remote UI On/Off,l (See the Remote UI User's Guide.)
- [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)
Additional Functions Settings Table 6-3

Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate'/ Group/
Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeW BtrnLeft/
TopRighV BtrnRight), Double (Left/ Right))
- With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate'/ Group/
Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRighV BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/
-With the Copy Tray-C3

Do not Collate/ Collate'/ Rotate Collating/
6-4 Additional Functions Settings Table

characters max.
Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 3,6, 12 hours, 1, 2,3', 7 ,

30 days, 0 (no limit)
System Manager ID: 7 digit number max.

System Password: 7 digit number max.
E-mail Address: 64 characters max.
Contact Information: 32 characters max.
Additional Functions Settings Table 6-5

-
--?.
-
------- . .'
'
'
.$Lj;j::. .
< m'. ., .
$jbp$$,~,!..!., :, ' .
' i. .. . - '
'Specifications that are Common to Each

Function (Common Settings)
NOTE
The Common Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ V ] and[A] keys to scroll to the
desired screen and make the required settings.
When the [ V ] or [ A ] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON

You can specify which screen to display, when you turn ON the main power. The System Monitor
screen also can be specified.
@ NOTE
The default settings as follows:
- Select Initial Function: Copy
- Set 'System Monitor ScreenJ'asinitial function: Off
- Set [Device] as the default for "System Monitor": On
1 Call up the desired screen as follows:
MdbPdf"nmbn5
key : .?iq-b b Initial COPY
Function cIl
. .............. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .......................... ...................... ..... ....... .................. ..... .....
2 Select the [Copy] or [Mail Box] key, and press

the [OK] key.
When you select the [Copy] key:
The Copy Basic Features screen is displayed
when the main power is turned ON, or after
Auto Clear.
When you select the [Mail Box] key:
The Mail Box selection screen is displayed
when the main power is turned ON, or after
-
.-L
m
=I
Auto Clear.
When using the System Monitor screen as initial
5 screen:
a Select the [On] key, and press the [OK] key. The
-0
C
cr~ System Monitor screen is displayd when the
O m main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear.
.G-0
-
E 0
0 a,
cnz @ NOTE
a When you do not want to set the Device window as
a default window in the System Monitor screen,
press the [Off] key and press the [OK] key. When
you select the [Ow key, the Copy window is set as
the default window.
6-6 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear

Gives you the choice of whether or not to display the screen set by this function after Auto Clear has
taken place.
@ NOTE
The time delay for Auto Clear can be set. (See "Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic
Screen after Finishing Operations,"onp. 6-26.)
The default setting is "Initial Function".
A
dd
mF m h x
key , :!,,+ C"""""Sstt"gh4 ,,:iiy Autoc Clear InitialSetting Function
................................... I
....................................................................
Select the [Initial Function] or [Selected Func-

tion] key, and press the [OK] key.
When you select the [Initial Function] key:

The screen set under Initial Function is dis-
played after Auto Clear has taken place. For
example, if Copy is set under Initial Function
and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail
Box function, the display returns to the Copy
When you select the [Selected Function] key:
The display returns to the screen that was dis-
played before Auto Clear takes place. For
example, even if Copy is set under Initial Func-
tion and Auto Clear takes place after setting the
Mail Box function, the display returns to the Mail
Box selection screen.

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) 6-7
i
I
Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone
Gives you the choice of whether or not to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the
following times:
Entry Tone : When pressing keys on the control panel or keys in the touch panel display
Error Tone : When a malfunction occurs (e.g. paper jam or operational error)
Job Done Tone : After the last copy has been made (e.g. outputting or stapling is completed)
@ NOTE
The default setting is "On" for all tones.
~ 1 Call up the desired screen as follows:
mfuncbom
@ key ! L ; 7 , b x,:tca-b Audible Tones

........ ... ....
I
................
2 Select the [On] or [Offl keys for "Entry Tone", rn rn ----- m-.&.-,
"Error Tone" and "Job Done Tone", and press [Audible Tones1
the [OK] key.
...................................................................................
[a)
System Monltor
4=
"0
.-
L
, 3 Press the [Done] key.
%
o
Setting Inch Input
You can display the keys for entering values in inches in the numeric entry screen.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "On':
ki3ba-d Fu&
@ key ;:;3r ,, 7: I~C~:"$Y

............................................................. I
..............-....
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] m rnp---- ,A.*., *--,
key. [Inch Entry1
[r
............................................................................
[
m a,
System Monitor
3 Press the [Done] key. .-

3

P
.-
C
3
V)
0
C
V)
0
.-C
z
V)
C
E
6
0
0
.-
C
C
V)
3
5
a
a
C
m
0 ~ )
.E a
z$
V)z
(D
Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settiqgs) 6-9
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection1 Auto
Drawer Switching
The paper drawers to be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching can be set.
This setting can be made independently for Copy, Mail Box, and other functions. It is useful when
different paper drawers are to be used for different purposes.
@ NOTE
Paper drawers set to On are used for the following functions:
- Auto Paper Selection (APS) :The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper
drawer) for the size of the original and the set ratio.
- Auto Drawer Switching (ADS) :If a paper drawer runs out of paper during a continuous printing job, the
machine automatically selects another paper drawer with the same
paper size and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.
The default settings are "Off" for the stack bypass and "On" for the paper drawers ( 1 to 4).
M+cdFu&%
key Drawer Eliglbiiity For APSIADS
2 Select the [Copy], [Mail Box], [Printer] or

[Other] key.
- rm----.. *-&A:-"-,
[Drawer Ellgibility For APSIADS]

I
@ NOTE
You can select the [Printer] and [Other] keys only
when the network printer function is enabled.
The [Other] key is pressed when setting the paper
drawers to be reported with the report printing.
SysteM Monitor
Select the [On] or [Off] key for the stack
bypass and each paper drawer, and press the
[OK] key.
When you select the [On] key:
Makes the paper drawer eligible for APSI ADS.
When you select the [Off] key:
Makes the paper drawer ineligible for APSI
ADS.
System Monitor
@ NOTE
When you select the [Copy] key.
When you select the [Copy] key, you can select
whether or not to set priority to paper type.
If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to On,
paper will not be fed even when paper runs out
during printing, unless other loaded papers suit the
size and stored type. For details of stored paper
types, see "Identifyingthe Type of Paper in a Paper
Drawer," on p. 6-12.
If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to Off,
paper will be fed from another paper drawer when
paper runs out during printing, if the same paper
size is loaded in that paper drawer.
When you select the [Printer] key, the Stack bypass
icon is not displayed.
The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol-
lowina ~laces.
, H ~ t a c bypass
k
,UPaper Drawer 1
OPaper Drawer 2
, OPaper Drawer 3
, OPaper Drawer 4
,OPaper Deck (option)

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settiqgs) 6-11
1 I
---L- -" -
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer
You can store the paper type loaded to each paper drawer.
mr
uF K d m Store Paper Type
key .!;
2 Select the paper drawer for which you want to C* TCr --,
F --
n8--1 1
store the paper type. [Store Paper Type1
LGL 0
IDoneJII
System Monitor
Select the paper type loaded in the paper

drawer, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
Load the same type of paper as set in each paper
drawer.
For details of paper types, see 'Available Paper
Stock," on p. 1 -17.
The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol-
lowing places.
OPaper Drawer 1
-OPaper Deck (option)
- -
@ NOTE
The paper types stored here are displayed when
selecting paper in each mode, as shown on the
right.
Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Seltings) 6-13
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting
~ You can change the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power consumed by the machine.
# NOTE
The default setting is 'L10%':
2 Select the [-lo%],[-25%], [-50%] or [None] key, m rn..---- m-*+:---,
and press the [OK' key. [Energy Saver Model
# NOTE
The approximate energy savings figures for each
mode and the approximatedelay times from power
ON to ready to print status are listed below.
- -1 0% mode :10% less power (approx. 50 sec.)'
- -25% mode :25% less power (approx. 90 sec.)'
- -50% mode :50% less power (approx. 180 sec.)'
1""1
1-1
;a None
...... .. ..... .. ...... ...... .. .. .......
In. system Manitor

- None : 2% less power (approx. 0 sec.)'
The figures in parenthesis ( ) show the approxi-
mate time it takes for the machine to return to the
1 5 1 ready to print status.
-
9
.-
=I
3
-
cn
0
V)
IS)
Press the [Done] key.
- -

.-
C
z
cn
-
IS)
.-C
V)
=I
a
a
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the
Machine
You can set the m,m,and (keys as the keys to reactivate the machine from the Energy
Saver mode.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "Off".
MdbonalF~ndm-6
@ key :1-, 7 4 -
!
;
.
: F u nb" ioff
o d e ~ Wake UP
..........................................................................................
Lxl
.............
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] m re*---- Pa*&: ---7
key. [Function Key Wake Up1
[II
.....................................................................................
[OI],
System Monitor L
- - - 3
P
.-
C
3 Press the [Done] key. 2

0
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode r:

You can set the amount of energy consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode.
@ NOTE
0
0
c
.-
I
C
If either the [Function Key Wake Up], [AppleTalk Settings], or [NetWare Settings] is set to "On", the energy 2
consumption when the machine enters the Sleep mode is 'High" regardless of this setting. For details of
the NetWare Settings and AppleTalk Settings, see the Network Guide.
$
-0
The default setting is ''Low''. c
m
.E -0
1 Call up the desired screen as follows: %$
cnz
M5dmlFurabnr
@ key )?. . 'm :.)lil-

Energy
b LOW
Consumption in sleep Mode
...............................................................................................................
- -
2 Select the [Low] or [High] key, and press the m rn ---A- P-.&-"-,
[OK] key. [Energy Consunptlon In Sleep Model
1-1 1-1
System Monltor

Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals

1 When scanning LTRR size or STMT size originals set on the platen glass, you can make a setting to
either distinguish the original sizes manually, or to scan originals of only one of these sizes.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "Use LTRR Format".
.= 1 Call up the desired screen as follows:

0
c
V)
W F u ~ d m
@
key -a:-b ,
LTRR/STMT Use LTRR Original Selection
.......................................................................................................................... LJ
B
$
c
2 Select the [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR
Format] or [Use STMT Format] key, and press
E the [OK] key.
5
0
W
When you select the [Distinguish Manually] key:
.-
+
C If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the
V)
3 platen glass, a display to select the original size
3
a appears when scanning.
-0
When you select the [Use LTRR Format] key:
5 If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the
w
.G42 platen glass, the machine detects it as LTRR-
3~ a,
aJ aJ
VJZ size original.
(D When you select the [Use STMT Format] key:
If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the
platen glass, the machine detects it as STMT-
size original.
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function

You can select the function for which each output tray of the Finisher-F1 (option) or the Saddle
I
Finisher-F2 (option) is to be used.
0 IMPORTANT
This function cannot be set when the Finisher-F1 or the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
@ NOTE
The default settings are as follows:
- Tray A: Copy, Printer, Other - Tray B: Copy, Printer, Other
It is possible to assign a single tray to multiple functions.
We recommend attaching the supplied labels to the trays for identifying their respective use.
Blank labels are also provided which you can fill out yourself.
-1
2 Select the functions of dedicated output trays I= rn----- ?-A+:---3 I 5+'

.-
A and B, and press the [OK] key. [Tray Designation]
s
@ NOTE
You can select the [Printer] key only when the net-
work ~rinterfunction is enabled.
prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as
"Other':
When the paper reaches the stacking limit of the
tray while both trays are set as the designated tray
System Monitor
for a certain function, the machine automatically
changes the output tray to other available tray.
When you want to set a tray as the designated tray
for only a certain function, select only that function.

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) 6-17 ~
Setting the Printing Priority
You can set the printing priority. A job that is set to a high priority is printed preferentially after the job
currently being performed.
@ NOTE
.
- Copy: 1 (Priority) Printer: 2 Other: 3 (1, 2 and 3 indicate priority sequence.)
Priority printing will not take place even when you set the highest priority until the current job is completed.
However, if the current job is paused, printing of the job from a function with higher priority may be started
depending on the settings set.
2 Select the printing priority, and press the [OK]

key.
Setting [I] sets the highest printing priority.
@ NOTE
You can select the [Printer] key only when the net-
work printer function is enabled.
Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as
"Others".
When the same printing priority has been set for
multiple functions, printing starts from whichever of
the functions is set to print first.
(I)
cn
.-
C
z
rn 3 Press the [Done] key.
cn
.-
C
C
(I)
3
5
a
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass
You can set the standard mode for the paper to be loaded in the stack bypass.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "Off''.
MSbonal F u K t m
@
key ...: Jco'""ssnnss4 x-ir: Standard Stack Bypass Settlllgs
Off
...........................................................................................................................
d
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key.
@ NOTE
* When you select the [On] key, the mode returns to
the stored standard paper mode when you press
the key or after Auto Clear has taken place.
When you select the [Off] key:
Proceed to step 3.
When you select the [On] key:

Press the [Store] key.
.-C I
z
(I)
Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.
@ NOTE
To select A or 19series paper size, press the [AB-
size] key
.....................................................................................................
System Monitor
Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.
System Monitor

[Standard Stack Bypass Settings1
..................................................................................................................
....................................................................................
Systeln Monitor

Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing
The machine prints documents with the standard Local Print settings set here when printing
documents in the Mail Box without changing the settings set when documents were scanned, or
when printing documents sent from a personal computer after pressing the [Change P Settings] key.
It also prints with the standard Local Print settings when you merge documents.
Paper Select (Paper source)
Copies
Finisher
-With the Finisher
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))
-With the Finisher+PuncherUnit-B1
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/ Hole Punch
-With the Copy Tray-C3
Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collate/ Group/ Rotate Group
Two-sided Print (On/ Off)
Erase Document After Printing (On/ Off)
Merge Documents (On/ Off)
# NOTE
- Paper Select : Auto
- Copies :1
- Finisher :Offset Collate (With the Finisher)
- Two-sided Print :Off "
- Erase Document After Printing :Off

- Merge Documents :Off
hww ~vmm key ,..G7w

-j2Bw Standard Local Prlnt Settings
@9 . ......... .-.. L
.. I
Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) 6-21 ~
2 Set each mode. a
.) r" ---A- *A**:..--, 11
Paper Select
1s [Standard Locai Prlnt Settingsl
Select the paper source. III paper select -I II
--- - -
Copies t1
................................................................................................................................
Set the number of copies from 1 set to 2000 Finisher
t Offset Collate
sets.
Finisher 1 Done Jy
Set the type of collating.
l ~ y s t e mMonitor 4
Two-sided Print
Set whether or not to perform two-sided print-
ing. I= rm*---- --A&:---> 11
1s [Standard Local Print Settingsl I1
Erase Document After Printing
Set whether or not to erase the document after
printing.
Merge Documents
Set whether or not to merge documents when
you select multiple documents.
3 Once you have completed all settings, press I

the [Done] key. [Standard Local Print Settingsl
l ~ v s t e mMonitor d

Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults
This function allows you to return the common settings to their defaults (initial settings).
Md
m FWQK lnltlallze Common Sett~ngs
@ key Uo El
2 Select the [Yes] key. [Cornon Settings1
@ NOTE [Initialize]
To cancel initialization, select the [No] key
. - Id
System Monitor ,
This screen is displayed for about two seconds. 1~ [common settings] I

@ NOTE
The Timer Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ V ] and [ A ] keys to scroll to the
When the [ V ] or [ A ] key should be pressed, the indication d w is displayed in this manual.
' Setting the Current Date and Time

Sets the current date and time. The date and time set here is also used as the time setting required
for functions for which the time can be set.
Mi~Furaonr Date & Time Settings

@ key .
+-$! : ! , - .......... !.b3!2~l?l?5b~
2 Enter the current date (year, month, day) and

(a-a), m r7:--- e-..,---,
~ P
5
time with the Numeric keys
press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
and rn RtCIate 8 Time Settings] Use the nuneric keys.
03/25 2001 15:OO
(1 13/25 2001 15:OO 1 r

r i
j
P
.-
C
Enter the date as four digits without a space.
- Example: March 25 + 0325
c? ................
Enter all the four digits for the year. ................................................................
0
C
cn Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits [CancelJ
W without a space.
.-
C
z
cn
- Example: 7:05 a.m. + 0705
11:18p.m.+ 2318
C
* If you make a mistake when entering values, press
E the 8 key, and enter the values again starting with
5.
,
u
the year.
W When setting the Time Zone Settings: w rT:--- "-a& 4--- 7
.-
C
C Press the [Time Zone Settings] key, then select rn [Tine Zone Settingsl
cn
3
a the time zone where the machine is located.
a Then press the [OK] key.
0 GMT-05:OO GMT-06:OO
C
m
a @ NOTE
.&
a=a a
a
G Press the [ V ] or [ A ] key to scroll the list.
*Thedefault setting is "GMT-5:OO':
cnz
Central time (US Canada) :GMT-5:00
<D Eastern time (US Canada) :GMT-6:OO
Mountain time (US Canada) :GMT-7:00
Pacific time (US Canada) :GMT-8:00
6-24 Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)

When setting the Summertime Settings:
Press the [Summertime Settings] key, then [Summertime Settlngsl
press the [On] key. Enter the dates for both the Use Summertime Settings m(Off1
Start Date and End Date with the Numeric keys
(@-a), and press the [OK] key. )104/01;;2he numerlc
@ NO-rE wl 104/01;;sfhe numeric
The default setting is "Off" .......................................................................................................... ........

When you set the Summertime, the machine auto- [Cancel]
matically sets the standard time of the machine
one-hour forward.
System Monitor ,

Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Opera-

tions
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the control panel
power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine then enters the Sleep mode.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "1 hour''.
k
$
C
.-
1 Call up the desired screen as follows: 5
2 Enter the desired Auto Sleep Time with the p ] m r7:--- "*+-I".,-,
or [A] key, and press the [OK] key. [Change Auto Sleep Time1
The Auto Sleep Time settings are 10,15,20,30,

40,50minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 Dl
[ , f , " ~ i ~ k ~ \ , ~
hrs
hours (in one-hour increments).
[Cancell [ i ]
mv)
.E n
?$$
02
3 Press the [Done] key. (0
Setting the Timer (Timer SeHings) 6-25
1 I 1 -- - ------
Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen
after Finishing Operations
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the display returns
to the Basic screen (Standard setting) of the selected function.
This time is called "Auto Clear Time". Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one-minute
increments. Auto Clear Time can also be set to "Off".
@ NOTE
The default setting is "2 minutes".
When "0"isset, Auto Clear function is not set.
2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric

keys (a-
a)
the [OK] key.
or [-I and [+I keys, and press
The Auto Clear Time settings are from 0 to 9

minutes (in one-minute increments).


Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task
This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specified amount of time has elapsed following a print
job or after a key has been pressed. On this screen you can specify the amount of time that must
elapse prior to entering the Quiet mode.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "1 minute".
When "0"is set, the Quiet mode is not set.
1 Call up the desired screen as follows: ~

W M IFwmbm
@ key
..17w
7 4 ,,:,:: Time Until unlt Quiets Down
c !mink)
.................................. .................... .......................
I
....................
2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric

keys (a- @) or [-I and [+I keys, and press $p
, -q
&[~lme Until Unit Quiets Down1
the [OK] key.
The Quiet mode settings are from 0 to 9 minutes mmin
,
(in one-minute increments).
, 1 . 1
...................................................................................
[Cancel]
L
System Monitor =I
9
.-
C
=I
3 Press the [Done] key. V)
0
C
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) 6-27

Setting the Time That the Unit's Power Turns OFF on Differ-
ent Days of the Week
You can set the time that the machine is automatically turned OFF for each day of the week.
Setting range: Daily from Sunday to Saturday, 00:OO to 23:59 in one-minute increments
@ NOTE
The default setting is "no setting".
When Auto Clear Time and Daily Timer are both set, Auto Clear Time has priority.
unwFvr6pnr
@
key ,)-L-b 7 4 m rn b Daily Tifler Settings
..................... ,.,,..,.,,.,,.., ,., I
,., ,.,,.,,,,,,,,,.,,.,,., ,
2 Select the day of the week, enter the time with

the Numeric keys
[OK] key.
(a-a),and press the
m r7;--- P-&&:---,
&[~aily Timer Settings1

Use the numeric keys.
.! ! I.
(00:OO-2359)
'I i'
j _ _ : _ _/ / _ _ : _ _ iI _ _ I _ _ i / _ _ : _ _j '
I i
@ NOTE
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits
without a space.
- Example: 7:05a.m. + 0705
11:18p.m. + 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time,
System Monitor
choose the day of the week again, then enter a
four-digit number.
If you do not want to specify the time, press
(I)
the 8key
0)
.-
C
E
Cn

Setting the Low-Power Mode Time
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have
been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode.
You can easily change the time for the machine to enter the Low-Power mode.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "15 minutes".
1 Call up the desired screen as follows: ~

2 Select the Low-Power Mode Time by pressing p
the [V] or [A] key, and press the [OK] key. [LOW-power Mode Time]
The Low-Power Mode Time settings are 10, 15,

20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 m m i n
to 4 hours (in one-hour increments).
...........................................................................................
Ti [a)
System Monitor
L
3
P
.-
C
3
(I)
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) 6-29

# NOTE
The Adjustment/Cleaningscreen is made up of several screens. Use the [ V ] and[A] keys to scroll to the
When the [ V ] or [ A ] key should be pressed, the indication is d~splayedin this manual.
I
Fine-adlusting Zoom When Differences in Original lmage
and Print lmage Occur
When you print a copy or a document in a box, if a slight difference occurs between the size of the
original image and the size of the print image, you can perform fine adjustment so as to reduce this
error.
hnh-AFu'da-6
@ key +:;T, ll,i::~-b Zoom Fine Adjustment

................................................................................... I
...........................
Z Press the [-I or [+I key to adjust the percent- )- ,A, r,.m+m--+,p3---:--,
age (%), and press the [OK] key. I$p [zoom Flne AdJustmentl
The adjustment range for both the X (left-right

direction) and the Y (up-down direction) is from
-1.0 % to +I .0 OO/ in 0.1 % increments.
# NOTE
You can check the adjustment result by pressing
the -@ key during adjustment when setting for the
Copy function.

6-30 Adjusting the Machine (AdjustmentlCleaning)

Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher
After a staple jam in the Saddle Finisher Unit has been cleared or staples are loaded in the Saddle
Finisher, this function feeds paper to the unit and staples a few times, so that staples will be
immediately available for the next job.
0 IMPORTANT
This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
@ NOTE
The required paper is fed automatically.
The following paper sizes can be used for this function: 1 1 'k17"/ LTRR.
~ m a~undmr
l Saddle Stitcher Staple Repasitlaning
....................................................................................................
2 Press the [Start] key.
@ NOTE Press the Start key.

To cancel the staple repositioning, press the [Can-
cel] key
................................................................. ..
cn
0
3 Press the [Done] key. .-C
Fi
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. cn
C
E
E
0
Adjusting the Machine (AdjustmentlCleaning) 6-31

Changing the Saddle Stitch Position
When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached, slight position differences in the saddle stitch position
may occur. You can compensate for such differences.
0 IMPORTANT
This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
kakdf"mkm
key v i l,i,:,,!;i
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment
I
...,.. ... ..
2 Select the paper size for which you want to I u r... ._--... r m 7 i
change the saddle stitch position. [Saadle s t tcn Poslrlon hdjustmenrl
@' NOTE
Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be
available in certain countries.
system Monitor 41
3 Use the [V] and [4keys to adjust the saddle I= r A d :.,-...--a, ", --,- -, I
stitch position, and press the [OK] key. A3, I I ~ I T
The setting range is from -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in

0.25 mm increments.
The example shows adiustment for

11"xl7"-size paper.

6-32 Adjusting the Machine (AdjustrnenVCleaning)

Adjusting the Standard Exposure
Adjusts the exposure adjustment scale to calibrate differences in exposure. Perform this adjustment
if differences between the image in the original and the print occur when printing an original free
from smudges or dirty marks with the exposure scale set in the middle.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "5':
2 Press the [Light] or [DarKJkeys to adjust the

exposure, and press the [OK] key. [Exposure Recalibrationl
nnnnAnmnn rZ1
tEzazzl
............
[cancell
... ......
[m],
..

-
9
s
3
.-

g~
0)
V)
.-
C
' 0Z
Adjusting the Machine (AdjustmentlCleaning) 6-33

@ NOTE
The Copy Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [V]and[A] keys to scroll to the
When the [V]or[A] key should be pressed, the indication Y-J is displayed in this manual.
Setting Standard Keys

You can store up to two Standard keys from the Copy Ratio, Finisher and Two-sided Mode keys on
the Basic Features screen, the keys in the Special Features screen, or the memory keys containing
copy jobs stored in the Mode Memory.
2 Press the [V]or [A]key and press the group IRa reen,. "-+
.-,"?
.
of the function that you want to store as your [Standard Key I Settings] r,,, Setting 1
favorite key.
L
9.-
z
C
0
C
(I)
0)
.-K
z
VJ
I l~vstemMonitor d
K
E 3
0
s Select the desired mode to be stored as a
Standard key, and press the [OK] key.
m rea-.. ,--..,--, I
0)
.-K
C
1 5
(I)
6-34 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)

4 Press the [Done] key. Selected mode
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen
appears again.
lsystem Monltor ,/I

Example: Standard keys 1 and 2 are displayed in Ready t o copy.
the touch panel display as shown on the
right.
I I / pystem Monitor (1
I Standard key 2
Standard key 1
Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) 6-35

Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off
This function allows automatic selection of the Collate (Offset Collate) mode when the original is
placed in the feeder. This is helpful when making multiple copies, because the user does not need
to remember to select the Finisher mode.
@ NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to "On" with the Finisher (option) attached, the Offset Collate mode will be set.
Without any output option attached, the Collate mode will be set.
The default setting is "On".
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK]

key.
- r".",.
[auto Collate1
?-+A,..--,
[I
.....................................................................................
[Cancell la),


Setting lmage Orientation Priority to OnlOff
The orientation of the image may be printed conversely depending on the copy mode set.You can
set whether or not to copy the image in the same direction as the original.
@ NO-rE
When the lmage Orientation Priority is "On'; the first copy time will take longer.
M Furdm
@ key .L,L.R-b ICopvSsff'"ss4 ;,7L image Orientation Priority

b Off
..................
Eil

key.
L
=I
9
3 Press the [Done] key. .-
C
3
cn
-.
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. o
+

Setting the Job Duration Display
When the Job Duration Display is set to "On", the time remaining until completion of the copy job
(Job Duration Time) is indicated in minutes in the touch panel display. (The job duration time is not
displayed for some copy modes.)
@ NOTE
The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different
Size Originals, Rotate Collating, and Rotate Grouping modes or when the copy waiting time is less than
one minute.
w h"mnr
@
key .: 4- J O b ~ ~ ~ ~Display
..........
' 0 ' '
........... . ............. . . . ...... ....... .......... Ell
.......... .... . . .

key.
V)
K 3 Press the [Done] key.


Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off
Using parameters such as original size and zoom ratio, this function automatically rotates the image
to the most suitable position for the set paper size.
@ NO'TE
The default setting is "On':
-
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] IH rma-,. --&&>---I I
key. [ ~ u t oorientatlonl
@ NOTE
Only standard size originals up to LTR (for direct
zoom ratio) can be rotated.
When Automatic Paper Selection is selected, the
paper matching the width will be displayed as the
optimum size if there is no paper with the optimum
length.

Setting Specificationsof the Copy Function (Copy Settings) 6-39

Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function
You can set whether or not to use the Photo mode in the Copy function. When the Photo Mode is
"On", you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when making copies with the image quality
setting.
@ NOTE
The default setting is "Off':
mhvcPka
key :r:i5-b Phot$p d
63 3.
.............--.... ..
2 Select the [On] or [Ow key, and press the [OK] r^u:^-^,
C. I*......
key. [Photo Model
[II
........................ .-............................ -..............
[Cancell
I! 5
9
"
z 3 Press the [Done] key.
0
+ Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
0
2
.-

Changing the Current Standard Settings
Standard Settings refers to a combination of copy modes that the machine is set to after the power
is turned ON or when the g key is pressed.
This section describes how to store the currently set copy settings as the Standard Settings.
Standard Settings can also be returned to their default settings.
,@ NOTE
- Copy quantity: 1
- Paper selection: Automatic Paper Selection
- Exposure/ Image quality: A
- Copy Ratio: Direct (100%)
- Copy function: 1 +1-sided copy
Storing the Standard Settings for Copying

@ NOTE
To change the Standard Settings, Copy settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings
beforehand. (See "Flow of Copy Operations,"onp. 2-3.)
L
3
2 Press the [Store] key. 9
.-
C
=J
(I)
Select Store or lnltlalize. V)

m
.-
C
E
(I)

3 Press the [Yes] key. 1- rm --,. pqA.:---, I
The settings currently displayed are stored as the i%

YOU wish t o store &IS setting?
Standard Settings. Standard Settings detalls
100% Auto I aooooioaoo~81

............................................................................................................
@ NO-rE i~inisher '10ttset collate'/
The settings displayed here are the currently set
copy settings. Press the [ V ] or [ A ] key to display
copy modes that do not fit in the display area.
To cancel storing the currently displayed settings
as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key The
display returns to the screen in step 2.
This screen is displayed for about two seconds.
F
9
1
-
.-
C
&
0
C
Initializing the Standard Settings
V)
cn
.-
C
g 1 Call up the desired screen as follows:

a
a
W F U &
key IF
Standard Settings
.............................................................................
S
cn
c
.-
2 Press the [Initialize] key.
Select Store or Initialize.

3 Check the setting, and press the [Yes] key. I- ro--,. *..*&: ---,
The Standard Settings are initialized. R OK t o initialize?.
@ NOTE
To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key The
display returns to the screen in step 2.
This screen is displayed for about two seconds. buw rm-.... ?-**,-"-7
-.
Initialized.
Standard Settings details
.., ..... . .. ,..,., .. . . .. .. .


Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings
Items that have been changed in the Copy Settings can be returned to their default settings.
WFuraom
@
key ;,, JCOwSs't"sS4 .,iiw Initialize COPY Settings
,,.,..,,.,,.,,.,,., , , ,.,,.,
,
G I.
.,. . ........ ............. . .... .............................
2 Press the [Yes] key. [Copy Settlngsl
Proceed to step 3.
@' NOTE IS i t OK t o initlalire?
To cancel the initialization of copy settings, press

the [No] key The display returns to Copy Setting
screen.
[r
. -- 1 ! 3
System Monltor ,
This screen is displayed for about two seconds. [Copy Settlngsl
b [Initlalirel
(7,
C
g 3 Press the [Done] key.
~ 6-44 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)

ations of the Mail Box Function (Mail
Box Selings)
Setting/ Storing the Box
When using the box, you can set and store each box item beforehand.
# NOTE
A box can store up to 100 items (Box number: 00 to 99).
2 Press the desired box number.
# NOTE
When entering the box number using the Numeric
keys (a-a), press the [OK] key after entering the
box number.
3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key.
# NOTE
Enter the password stored under Box SetIStore
setting. This step is not required when setting the
box for the first time or if a password is not stored.
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (MailBox Settings) 6-45

4 Press the [Store Name] key.
mDoc. Auto Erase
5 Enter the box name, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see
on p. 10-6.
assign for a name is 24.
To c&-~cel storing, press the [Cancel] key
lb
L
P
6 Enter the password with the Numeric keys
.-
C
3
0
(@-@ I .
0
+
V)
0 IMPORTANT Start
ZS) Since there is no way to check the password

.-
K
stored, please record the password you stored and
E
V)
keep it separateiy.
K @ NO-rE
g If no password is stored, proceed to step 7.
E,
0
You can delete the number you entered by pressing
ZS)
8
the key
.-
+
K To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key
c
d
5
Q. 7 Set the amount of time to elapse before
zm received documents are automatically deleted
mu) by pressing the [V] or [A] key, and press the
.& u [OK] key.
E:
az
(D
-,@ NO-rE
The default setting is "3 days':
mDoc. Auto Erase
6-46 Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (MailBox Settings)


Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (MailBox Seftirlgs) 6-47

Initializing a Box
0 IMPORTANT
You cannot initialize a box if there is data remaining in it.
2 Select the box that you want to initialize.

[Box SetIStorel
Remaining Memory: i ' . ' . ' . . ' '--I ' 94x
@ NOTE 1Number 1
Name I Mem. I I
When entering the box number using the Numeric El
keys (a-a), press the [OK] key after entering the 1/25
box number. El
.. .... .......
1-
System Monitor ,
3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
Enter the password used when the box was stored.
(See "Setting/ Storing the Box," on p. 6-45.) If a
password is not stored, this operation is not
required.
4 Press the [Initialize] key. I .- - . . .

168 reox 001
I moo
.Doc. Auto Erase
System Monitor

The box is initialized.
@ NOTE
To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key
b Press the [Done] key.

L
3
9 I
-
0)
.-c
V)
3
3
a
-0
c
m
.G-0
g%
cnz

Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function
You can select whether or not to use the Photo Mode in the Mail Box Function. When the Photo
Mode is "On", you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when scanning documents with the
image quality setting.
@ NOTE
Off
2 Select the [On] or [Offl key, and press the [OK]

key.
]"I


Setting the Standard mode for Scanning
You can change the standard mode for when scanning originals into a box. You can also return the
standard mode settings to their defaults.
@ NOTE
- Document Size: Auto
- Record Size: Auto
- Exposure/ Image quality: A
Storing the Standard Settings for Scanning

@ NO-rE
To change the Standard Settings, Scan settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings
beforehand. (See 'Storing Originals in the Box,"on p. 4-2.)
2 Press the [Store] key. Sa r,,-:, n".. p-*+; ---I i

[Standard Settings]
Select Store or initialize.
[ j p i i q
m
n
System Monitor

The settings currently displayed are stored. 1 DO YOU wish t o store this setting?
@ NOTE
...
DOC. Size Rec. Size
!!!Jox ~.~t.0~.~.~~~.A.u.t.0..~eo~~o~e~oo~1.0~..
,,,,.,,
The settings displayed here are the currently set
scan settings. Press the [V]or[A] key to display
the scan modes that do not fit in the display area.
To cancel storing the currently displayed settings
as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key The
display returns to the screen in step 2. System Monitor

This screen is displayed for about two seconds. m r,,..;, ""~.
P-+.:"--, I
-.
Stored in memory.

Doc. Size Rec. Size
....!!2!28 Au1.n.........A . ~ ~ t ~ o ~ ~ ~ ~ e q o ~ ~ i o ~ ~ o ~ ~ O ~ .
M System Monitor

Initializing the Standard mode for Scanning

M i l i d FurrDoa
key L..
Standard Scan Settings
, ,...,.. .................................
a
... ......... . ...... ....
2 Select the [Initialize] key.
Select store or hitialize.
3 Check the settings, and press the [Yes] key.

-
m r.4-8, n*., "-.+;",.-,
-
The Standard Settings are initialized. Is it OK t o Initialize?

@ NOTE
!POI.......B . u . t . ~A.~.to...eooo~i~~oocO~~...
To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The
ggggg.
"=
-,
display returns to the screen in step 2. I
1 system Monitor
L

This screen is displayed for about two seconds.
1 Standard Settiw

Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail BoxSettings) 6-53

?--.
. . e System Management
'' ID (System settinos)
Setting1 Changing the System Manager ID and Password
You can set a password for the system manager. If the System Manager ID/ Password is set,
restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.
@ NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see "Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,"
on p. 10-6.
The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name, contact, and comment is 32, and
for a E-mail address is 64.
The maximum number of numbers you can store for the System Manager ID and Password is seven. If
you store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:
- Example: When "321"is entered + '0000321"is stored
@ NOTE
When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password
after pressing the [System Settings] key Then, press the @ key
2 Press the [System Manager] key, then enter I- &.",?. &

-.. ?,.-&.. --.-:-- *--A ..--- I
the name of the system manager. [System Manager Settings]
@ NOTE
To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key
nla!b""&:t:r
r : : ; t e : nab i ~
3 Press the [System Manager ID] key, and enter

the number within seven digits with the
Numeric keys
Manager ID.
(a-@) as the new System
@ NOTE
You cannot store a System Manager ID with only
the number "O",such as '0000000''.
You must set the System Manager ID.
You can delete the number you entered by pressing
the $I key.
I To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key
~ 6-54 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)

Press the [System Password] key, and enter p.
the number within seven digits with the rn [System Manager Settingsl
Numeric keys (a- @) as the new System
Password. Then press the [Next] key. r i (Hakajima
m&:p:e$;F
@ NOTE Use the numercc keys.
You cannot store a System Password with only the 1111111Use the numeric keys.
number "O",such as '8000000".
Press the [Next] key when not setting the System
Password.
system Monitor
To erase the entered character (number), press
the &jkey.
To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
5 Press the [E-mail Address] key, then enter e- I

mail address of the system manager. Irn [system Manager Settings]
System Monitor
6 Press the [Contact Information] key, then enter A P^,.."* A*. r..-**.. r-rr;,.. r... ...-..
where to contact the system manager. [System Manager Settings1
System Monitor ,
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings) 6-55

/ Press the [Comment] key, then enter a com- I- P+-. ..-
.,....--. ?.++,-- +--. ..---
ment for the System manager. [System Manager S t t l n g s l
8 once you have completed all settings, press

the [OK] key.
L
3 9 Press the [Done] key.
6-56 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)

Setting the Department ID Management
By storing a Department ID and Password for each department, you can set the machine so that its
functions can be used only after the correct password has been entered.
This is called "Department ID Management". Department IDSand Passwords for up to 1000
departments can be stored.This function allows you to check the print totals for each department for
management purposes.
With Department ID Management, the following operations can be performed:
Setting whether or not to set Department ID Management
Storing the Department ID and the Password
@ NOTE
The maximum number of numbers you can store for the Department ID and Password is seven. If you
store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:
- Example: When "321"is entered + "0000321"is stored
Storing the Department ID and Password

@ NOTE
after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the @ key.
Select whether to use the Department ID Man- R r.,... a*.. r

.
a *..rr:-. a,-& ,..-, I
agement function. [Department ID Management1 In
IS)
When you select the [Off'] key: .-C
Press the [OK] key, then press the [Done] key. E
(I)
The display returns to the Additional Functions
screen. i _.._ ......_ .................................................
; $,;x;c%;: $k:<.
: ' , pGl110!( 1
When you select [On] key: L.
................................................... ... .- .... ...
To store the Department ID and Password, 1 7 [OK] IS)
.-C
press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key and Systefl Monltor C
In
3
proceed to step 3. 5
a
-0
3 Press the [Store] key. m ................................
[store Dept. ID/Pmswordl Max. 1000
S
IS)
.& G
I
Dept. m 1 Password I 1 r.a
$2
System Monitor ,
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (SystemSettings) 6-57

4 Press the [Department ID] key and enter the
Department ID with the Numeric keys (@ -
@ 1.
@ NOTE
You cannot store a Department ID with only the
number "O",such as "0000000':
3 Press the [Password] key and enter the pass- 1- ............................. I

word with the Numeric keys (@ -@ ). to tor el Use the n:lerlc keys.
@ NOTE
You cannot store a Password with only the number
"0'; such as "0000000':
I lDepartlentlDpq
When a password is not stored, you can use this
machine by entering only the Department ID. .......................................................................................................................................
System Monitor
-
6 press the [OK] key.
IS)
.-
K
C
V)
3
7 Press the [OK] key. p
a
a
[Store Dept. ID/Passwordl Max. I000
Dept. ID 1 1 Password I (
IS)
.E 8
pqT4p-j
[Cancell

@ NO-rE
When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man-
agement is enabled. (See "Entering the Depart-
ment ID and Password," on p. 10-4.)

Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. , Department ID and Password using the
R ~ n t e rthe
For details on how to enter the Department ID and numeric keys.
Password, see "Entering the Department ID and
Password," o n p. 10-4. 0
"""D
After enterlng ID and Password, press the ID
Key. After using the machine, press the ID
Key again.
Changing the Password

.-L
MdmrdFumn~
key j
ID Mana ement %
0
c
@ NOTE 0
E
after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the @ key. 5
0
0,
2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept.
IDIPassword] key.

3 Use the [V] and [4keys to display the Pass- IC. ................................ 1
word you want to change. Then select the [Store Dept. [D/Passwordl Max. I000
Password, and press the [Edit] key.
System Monitor
4
(@-a),
Enter the Password with the Numeric keys
@ NOTE
m Department ID 2222222
You cannot store a password with only the number
"0';such as "0000000".
...................................................................................
2 5 Press the [OK] key. m ,--,*-a &L.. P.,-A-- m-**3..- *"-*,,---

2,
.- [Store Dept. ID/Passwordl Max. 1000
z
0
1 Dept. 10
..................................
1 Password
...................... ....
I
*
0000002 0000002
.................................................................................
p q
............. .. ......................................................
System Monitor
m
.-c
"
a
3 6 press the [OK] key.
a @
zm NO-rE
OV) agement is enabled. (See "Entering the Depart-
.E -a
%$ ment ID and Password," on p. 10-4.)
cnz

Repeat this until the screen on the right appears.
Enter the Department ID and Password using the
For details on how to enter the Department ID and 'numeric keys.

Password," on p. 10-4.

Key again.
Erasing the Department ID and Password

MmFum
@ key -b v d :;-b
, 7ID Mana ement
4
@ NO-rE
after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the @ key.
2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept.

ID/ Password] key.
3 Use the [V] and [A] keys to display the Depart- rn r.,..r A*. ",.^*-.. +
..+
,.I ^
ment you want to erase.Then select the [Store Dept. ID/Passwordl Max. IDDO
Department, and press the [Erase] key. I Dept. ID i Password I I
System Monitor ,

4 Press the [Yes] key. m
+....,..P +-. .-....a-- ?PA&:.... --..--- I
The Department ID and Password are erased.
@ NOTE Is it OX t o erase?
To cancel erasing, press the [No] key
System Monitor
5 Press the [OK] key. - e-m--* ?..-**-

[Store Dept. iD/Passwordl Max. 1000
p-**:..- -
.
A .---
I Dept. ID 1 Password 1 )
I
..I
1/1
piF--JFpq
.............. ................................ .... ........... ...........
,I-[ System Monitor
1 5 6 Press the [OK] key.

.-
C
$ @ NOTE
.-
0
V)
agernent is enabled. (See "Entering the Depart-
0
.-
C rnent ID and Password," on p. 10-4.)
z
(I)
C
EE
8
0
.-
C
-3
Ti3 7 Press the [Done] key.
2m For details on how to enter the Department ID and rwmerlc keys.
Password, see "Entering the ~ e ~ a r t m e ID
n tand
EFa
X Password,"on p. 10-4.
$2
After entering ID and Password, press the DI
Key. After uslng the machine, press the ID
Key again.

H Checking and Printing Counter Information
You can display and also print a list of the count of the paper that was used by each department.
@' NOTE
2 Select the [On] key, and press the [PrintTotals]

key.
3 Check or print the count of print totals. L

3
The print total with the Department ID left blank

(not displayed) is the total of prints from the driver
not correspondent with a stored Department ID
(unknown ID).
When only checking the counter:
Press the [V]or [A] key to display the desired
Department, and check the print totals.
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (SystemSettings) 6-63

When printing the displayed list: IC. r-,-.* *,.- r..-A-.. r.*r:... a
.
-
* ...-A
Press the [Print List] key. [Print Totals1
I Dept. ID 1 Print Total I
o' aI/
iA
l:Y
l;
:
g~
. ...................
1-
System Monitor
The screen shown at right appears. Press the

[Yes] key.
@ NOTE
If you do not want to print, press the [No] key.
The screen on the right appears during printing.
b
m P -I-- & ?,.-Am" ?
-&
A:
..
" ,.---
@ NOTE
...
r To cancel printing, press the [Cancell key.
(P I) Printing
To close the screen, press the one] k&

L
3
9
............................................................................ ..........
...
V)
0)
.-K 0001 Report
Ei Prlntlng... System Monitor ,
%
0
K
5
0

@ NO-rE
ment ID and Password,"on p. 10-4.)

Enter the Departflent ID and Password using the
I
For details on how to enter the Department ID and 'nurnerlc keys.

M t e r entering ID and Password, press the ID

Key. After using the machlne, press the ID
Key again.
System Monitor ,
Erasing Print Totals .-5~
4d I
The following instructions describe how to delete the print totals made so far for all departments. 1
,o
V)

0)
.-c
E
L
@ NOTE 5
When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password 0
after pressing the [System Settings] key Then, press the @
keyI
-
0)
.-C
u,
2
2 Select the [On] key, and press the [Printlotals] I- --,-A *.- n..-.a- --&A:-- &--A
5
a
key.
.G u
I Accept Jobs
! with unknown ID ID"m
Systefl Monitor

3 Press the [Clear All Total4 key. rn e",....a .he p..-+-- ?-.A;-- - I
[Print Totals1
system Monitor
4 Select the [Yes] key. m p-,-,.+ +-., P.,-*- P-**z-" .,.--
@ NOTE
If you do not want to erase the counter, press the Erase all copy counts?
[No] key
System Manitar ,<

The message "Erased." is displayed in the touch
panel display for about two seconds.
system Monitor 41

@ NOTE

R ~ n t e rthe
, Departflent ID and Password using the
For details on how to enter the Department ID and numerlc keys.
1
~ e y .After using the machine, press the ID
Key again.
I I
System Monitor
Selecting whether or not to Accept Print Jobs of Unknown ID

You can set whether or not to print documents from a driver not correspondent with a stored
Department ID.
@ NOTE
The [Accept jobs with unknown ID] key is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled.
The default setting is "On".
1
~lmd~urnmnkey -7
Call up the desired screen as follows:
4 14angrJ
ID Mana ement
@ NOTE
after pressing the [System Settings] key Then, press the key
I1
-
-- 1r-=
2 Select the [On] key.
@ NOTE

key.
W h e n you select the [On] key:
Accepts print job from an unknown ID.
lWhen you select the [Off'] key:
Does not accept print job from an unknown ID.
system Monitor 41

For details on how to enter the Department ID and Ilnnumerk hn.


Key agam.

Setting Device Information
You can set the name of this machine and the place where it is located.
I
UdbJrd k r n
key ;- b l i
@ NOTE
2 Press the.[Device Name] and [Location] keys,

then enter the name of this machine and the [Device information settings]
location where this machine is placed. Then
press the [OK] key.
@ NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see """ s-5F

on p. 10-6.
The maximum number of character which can be
entered is 32.
To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key

I~
(I)
.-P
%
Erasing a Message Board (I)
A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are E
sent from the system manager using the utility software. You can erase a message displayed in the 5
0
message board.
@ NOTE
-
9)
.-C
(I)
3
The message board is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled. '0'
a
@ NOTE
after pressing the [System Settings] key Then, press the @ key.
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings) 6-69 ~

2 Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
When you select the [Yes] key:
The message is not displayed. Is ~tOK t o clear the contents
o f the Message Board?
When you select the [No] key:
The message remains displayed.

V)
0)
.-
C
%
(I)

Printing the Report
Printing the Contents of the Network Settings
@ NO-rE
For details of the contents of the User's Data List, see the Network Guide.
You can print the contents only when the network printer function is enabled.
2 Press the [Ye4 key. (m [Report Settings1 11

@ NOTE [User's Data List]
When you do not want to print, press the [No] key Print User's Data List?
The screen on the right appears during the report

printing.
@ NOTE
To cancel the report print, press the [Cancel] key
To close the screen, press the [Done] key

Printing the Report 6-71

Loading Paper and Adding
Toner
This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

.
Loading Paper in'the Paper Drawers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
AddingToner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
.
Consurnables and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-12
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 . 2
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
.
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers.
0 IMPORTANT
When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
@ NOTE
The following size paper can be loaded in the paper drawers:
- Paper drawer 1,2 :LTR
- Paper drawer 3,4 : 1 1 "XI7'1 LGU LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
For details of available paper stock which can be loaded in the paper drawers, see "Available Paper
Stock," on p. 1 -17.
~ Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers

When the selected paper has run out, or the selected
paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the
display prompting you to load paper appears.
..................................................
A CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your
Job NO. :0002
hands on the edges of the paper.

0 IMPORTANT ...................................................
The message will also appear if the selected paper

drawer is not fully inserted into the machine. Prop-
erly insert the paper drawer.
@ NOTE
You can check the amount of paper remaining in
the paper drawer by looking at the remaining paper
quantity display on the front of the paper drawer.
If the above message appears during printing, the
remaining prints will automatically be made after
you load paper. When you select other feeding
position, the remaining prints will be made after you
press the [OK] key.
To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key.
7-2 Loading Paper

Press, then release the paper drawer release
button of the paper drawer in which you want
to load paper.
2 Grip the handle and pull out the paper drawer

until it stops.
Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-3

3 Open a package of paper, and remove the
paper stack.
0 IMPORTANT
Rewrap any remaining paper in its original pack-
age, and store it in a dry place away from direct
sunlight.
Do not copy on the following types of paper stock.
Doing so may cause a paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled .paper.
.
- Transparencies.
- Paper on which color images have been copied.
- Paper which has been copied on using a digital
full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side
either).
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal
transferprinter (do not copy on the reverse side
either).
,-@ NOTE
Paper drawers 1 and 2 hold up to about 1,500 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold up to about 550 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.
4 Turn the paper stack over, and place it in the

paper drawer.
Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the
paper stack against the right wall of the paper
drawer.
0 IMPORTANT
If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it
in the paper drawer.
Make sure that the height of the paper stack does
not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper
drawer.
Make sure that the paper size setting in the paper
drawer matches the size of paper to be loaded.
@ NOTE
When loading paper in the paper drawer 3 for the
first time, set the size plate of the paper loaded in
the paper drawer.
For details of print direction of papers already
printed with logos or patterns, see "Relation of
Original Orientation and Paper Orientation," on
p. 1 1-9.
7-4 Loading Paper

5 Gently push the paper drawer back into the
machine until it clicks.
A CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original
position, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
0 IMPORTANT
Never place paper or any other items in the open
part of the paper drawer next to the paper stack.
Doing so may cause paper jams.
# NO-rE
When paper runs out during printing, load paper,
and follow the instructions in the touch panel dis-
play The machine automatically restarts the
remaining print.
Loading Paper and Addiqg Toner 7-5

Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size
If you want to load a new paper size in a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below to
adjust the paper drawer guides.
You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper size: 11"xl7"I LGU LTRI
LrRR/ STMTR.
0 IMPORTANT
The paper size loaded in the paper drawer 3 can be changed.
The paper sizes loaded in the paper drawer 4 can be changed by your service representative. For more
details, contact your service representative.
When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
1 Squeeze the lever on the length guide as

shown in the figure and slide the length guide
to align it with the mark for the desired paper
size.
Length guide
When loading 11"xl7"-size paper, slide the length
guide all the way to the left, and drop it downward.
7-6 Loading Paper

2 Squeeze the lever on the width guide as
shown in the illustration. Without releasing the
lever, slide the width guide to align it with the
mark for the desired paper size.
0 IMPORTANT
If the length and width guides are not adjusted
properly for the paper size loaded in the paper
drawer, then the correct paper sizes might not
appear in the display. Not adjusting the guides cor-
rectly might cause paperjams, dirty prints or make
the inside of the machine dirty. To prevent these i
problems from occurring, make certain that the Width guide
guides are adjusted correctly for the loaded paper
size.
3 Change the paper drawer's size plate so that it

matches the new paper size that you loaded.

When there is only a small amount of toner remain-
ing, the message to the right appears in the display.
Prints can still be made, but at this time you should
purchase new toner so that you have it on hand
when it is needed.
A WARNING
Never dispose of the waste toner in a fire or
incinerator. Doing so may result in an explo-
sion.
@ NOTE
When this message appears, approximately 300
prints can still be made (LTR-size Canon Standard
Chart). However, since this number may vary
depending upon the original, it is recommended
that the toner be added as soon as possible.
When the toner has run out and prints can no longer
be made, the message describing how to add toner
appears in the display. Add toner following the
described procedure.
IMPORTANT
The screen prompting you to add toner is displayed
until you press the [Recover LaterDonel key
Use only the toner bottle recommended for use on
this machine.
Never add more than one bottle of toner.
Add toner after the 'Add tonerWmessage is dis-
played.
@ NOTE
You can check how to add toner by pressing the
[Previous] or [Next] key on the screen.
If the toner runs out during a print job, the remain-
ing prints will be made after you add toner.
7-8 Adding Toner

1 Open the toner supply cover.
2 Hold the toner bottle with both hands and turn

it up and down a few times as shown in the
illustration, to evenly distribute the toner
inside the bottle.
3 Align the protrusions of the toner bottle with

the slots on the toner supply port. Gently
press the toner bottle down onto the toner
supply port until you hear a click.
The toner bottle is now locked onto the toner
supply port.
4 Press down lightly on the toner bottle with one

hand, and pull out the black shutter of the
toner supply port as far as it will go.

5 Grip the shutter of the toner bottle, and pull it
out slowly until it stops.
Toner flows into the toner box.
6 Lightly tap the top of the toner bottle to make

sure that all of the toner empties into the toner
box.
7 Push back the shutter of the toner bottle.
5
K
0)
C
1 -F
I ;
~'
l
1 -
a
m
a
0)
C
10
h
8 Make sure you hear a click when the black
shutter of the toner supply port has been
pushed back in as far as the position.
When the toner bottle starts to come loose from
the toner supply port, lightly hold it so that it does
not fall over.
I
I A- CAUTION
Never try to remove the toner bottle before you
I
I hear the click, doing so can damage the toner
supply port.
7-10 Adding Toner

9 Remove the empty toner bottle from the toner
supply port.
A WARNING
Do not throw used toner bottles into open
flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining
inside the bottle and result in burns or a fire.
A CAUTION
W h e n removing used toner bottles from the
toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully
to prevent toner from scattering and entering
your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or
mouth, wash immediately with cold water and
consult a physician.
10Close the toner supply cover.

@ NOTE
Press the [Recover Later/Done] key to close the
screen prompting you to add toner.
11 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.

The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For details, consult your ser-
vice representative.
~ Consuma bles
Paper stock
In addition to plain paper (11 "x17"l LGU LTRI
STMT), transparencies, labels and other types of
paper stock are available. For details, consult your
service representative.
A CAUTION
Do not store paper in places exposed to open
flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite
and result in burns or a fire.
0 IMPORTANT
For high-quality print output, we recommend using
paper recommended by Canon.
To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining
paper tightly wrapped in its original package.
Black toner
When the "Add toner" message appears in the touch
panel display, add toner which has been approved for
use with this machine. Only black toner can be used
with this machine.
A WARNING
Never dispose of waste toner in a fire or incin-
erator. Doing so may result in an explosion.
A CAUTION
Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to
open flames, as this may cause the toner to
ignite and result in burns or a fire.
0 IMPORTANT
Store toner bottles in a cool location away from
direct sunlight. (The recommended storage condi-
tions: temperature below 86% and humidity below
SO%.)
7-12 Consumables and Options

Genuine supplies
Canon has developed and manufactured parts,
supplies and GPR-4 Toner specifically for use in this
machine. As such, for superior print quality, we
recommend that you use Canon-GENUINE brand
parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner in this machine.
Ask your authorized Canon dealer or service
provider for Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies
and GPR-4 Toner.
We recommend that you order paper stock and toner

from your service representative before they run out.
Options
Cassette
The paper drawer can be adjusted to hold the
paper size you want to load. For instructions on
how to adjust paper drawers for paper sizes, see
"Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper
Size," on p. 7-6.
You can adjust the paper drawer for the following
7"/ LGU CTR/ L-rRR/ STMTR.
paper sizes: 1 1 "XI
Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-13 I

Troubleshooting
- -
This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.
Removing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
CleaningtheFeeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 i
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..8-37
Removing Paper Jams
1 If a paper jam occurs, the following display appears in the touch panel display.
Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam

The display indicating the location of the paper jam appears in the touch panel display, followed by
instructions on how to clear the paper jam. This display will repeatedly appear in the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.
Example of display indicating the location of the Paper is Jammed in the Indicated
location. Remove the jammed paper.
paper jam.
W h e n you select the [Recover Later] key: Recover Later
You can continue operations such as mode set-
tings or scannings even when jammed paper is
not removed.
0 IMPORTANT
When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot
The paper has jammed.
continue the operation. Follow the directions in the
display to remove the jammed paper.
Example of display indicating how to clear the Lower the lever.
paper jam.
,::/I I
I ' I
The paper has jammed.

-
2
3
A CAUTION
When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
$ original or paper.
00 When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck-
laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.
When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the
toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your
hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with
warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper
gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. lf toner
enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
I
8-2 Removing Paper Jams
1 Inspect all areas which appear in the touch panel display, and remove any jammed paper.
See the appropriate pages for instructions on how to find and remove jammed paper.
Display indicating locations of the paper jam and page number describing how to remove
jammed paper.
Feeder (See p. 8-22.)
Exit slot
Remove the protruding Paper drawer 1 (Seep. 8-12.)
jammed paper.
~
Stack bypass (See p. 8-20.)
I
Right cover (See p. 8-10.)
~
I
I
I
Paper drawer 3 or 4 I
(See p. 8- 18.) 1
Paper drawer 2 (See p. 8- 15.) ~
0 IMPORTANT I
1
If a jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from inside the I
machine.
I
2 If a paper jam occurs within the optional units, see the description on the pages for each
option.
Finisher-F1, Saddle Finisher-F2, Paper Deck-GI

Puncher Unit-B1 (Seep. 9-13, p. 9-29.) (See p. 9-4.)
Copy Tray-C3
(See p. 9-35.)
Removing Paper Jams 8-3

3 After you have removed all paper jams at the locations indicated in the touch panel dis-
play, restore all levers and covers to their original positions.
4 Continue operations following the instructions displayed in the touch panel display.
If there is remaining paper to be removed:
The display indicating how to clear the paper jam appears in the touch panel display.
Repeat the procedure from step 1.
@ NOTE
Once you have cleared the paper jam in locations other than the Feeder, print operation restarts.

Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit
If a paper jam occurs in the main unit, a display
similar to the one on the right appears in the touch
panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and
follow the procedure below and the procedure that
appears in the touch panel display to remove the
jammed paper.
1 Open the front cover of the main unit.
2 Move the green lever in the direction of the

arrow.
e
3 Grip the lever and pull out the fixing unit. CQ
The fixing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out
together.
I
I
I

5 Open the left cover.
6 Turn the green knob in the direction of the

arrow, and remove any jammed paper.
A CAUTION
The parts located around the cover are subject
to high temperatures. When removing jammed
paper, take care not to touch anything in this
area except this cover.
7 Turn the duplexing unit knob in the direction of

the arrow displayed on the screen, and remove
any jammed paper.

8 Close the cover.
A CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in per-
sonal injury.
9 Gently push the fixing unit back into its origi-

nal position.
A CAUTION
When returning the fixing unit to its original
position, be careful not to get your fingers
I I
10 Return the green lever to its original position.
a I
.-c
C
0
0
c I
cn
P)
3
3
11 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the E I
I
duplexing unit. a0

12 Remove any jammed paper while opening the
left cover as shown in the illustration.
13Remove any jammed paper while opening the

right cover as shown in the illustration.
I 14 Open the duplexing transport unit, and remove

any jammed papers.
I m
.-
C
'l C
0
0
L rn
al
3
I1 E3
00
15 inal
Gently push the duplexing unit back to its orig-
position.
I
I
A CAUTION
When returning the duplexing unit to its origi-
nal position, be careful not to get your fingers

16 Remove all jammed papers, and close the front
cover.
A CAUTION
W h e n closing the cover, be careful not to get
sonal injury.
17Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.

(See "Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam," on p. 8-2.)
- -

Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover
If a paper jam Occurs in the right Cover, a display Paper is Jammed in the indicated
~ panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and
I
~
I
jammed paper.
i
i @ NOTE
When the Paper Deck-GI (option) is attached,
move the paper deck away from the main unit. (See
i "Paper Deck-G I," on p. 9-3.)
~ 1 Open the right cover (upper) of the main unit.

I
I
I
I
I
2 Remove any jammed paper.
I
I a0
3 Close the right cover (upper).
A CAUTION
sonal injury.
I
4 Open the right cover (lower) of the main unit.
Remove any jammed paper.
6 close the right cover (lower).
A CAUTION
sonal injury.

E

Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1
If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 1, a display
jammed paper.
@ NOTE
When the Paper Deck-G1 (option) is attached,
"Paper Deck-G 1," on p. 9-3.)
1 Open the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
00
3 Close the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
A CAUTION
sonal injury.

4 Press, then release the paper drawer release
button of the paper drawer indicated on the
touch panel display until the paper drawer
comes out.
5 Pull out the paper drawer 1.
7 Return the paper drawer to its original posi-

tion.
A CAUTION
position, be careful not to catch your fingers
between the edge of the paper drawer and the
main unit.


Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2 I
If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 2,a display &paper is jammed in the indicated I 1
panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and i
follow the procedure below and the procedure that I
appears in the touch panel display to remove the ;
jammed paper.
I
I
1 Open the front cover of the main unit.
2 Turn the green knob in the direction of the

arrow so as to feed the jammed paper to the
duplexing unit.
3 Gently pull out the duplexing unit. eO

4 Open the duplexing transport unit, and remove
any jammed paper.
5 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its orig-

inal position.
A CAUTION
When returning the duplexing unit to its origi-
nal position, be careful not to get your fingers
6 close the front cover of the main unit.
A CAUTION
sonal injury.

button of the paper drawer indicated on the
comes out.

8 Pull out the paper drawer 2.
10Return the paper drawer to its original posi-

tion.
A CAUTION
position, be caretul not to catch your tingers
between the edge of the paper drawer and the
main unit.
-
11 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. I=
CO

Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4
If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 3 or 4, a Paper is Jammed in the indicated
display similar to the one on the right appears in the
touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred,
and follow the procedure below and the procedure
IRecover Later
I
that appears in the touch panel display to remove the
jammed paper.
The paper has jammed. System Monltor

I

button of the paper drawer indicated in the
comes out.
2 Pull out the paper drawer.
CI)
.-
C
C
0
0
L
V)
a,
a3
0
I=
I 00 3 Remove any jammed paper.

4 Return the paper drawer to its original posi-
tion.
A CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to the original
position, be careful not to catch your fingers
between the top of the paper drawer and the
main unit.

(See "Display Indicating How to Clear the Jarn,"on p. 8-2.)
Removing Paper Jams ' 8-19

Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass
If a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, a display
jammed paper.
@ NOTE
When the Paper Deck-GI (option) is attached,
"Paper Deck-G 1,"on p. 9-3.)
1 Open the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
I
Close the right cover (upper).
A CAUTION
sonal injury.

(See "Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,"on p. 8-2.)

Removin~Paper Jams in the Feeder
If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a display similar &Paper is jamlned in the indicated
lacation. Remove the jammed paper.
to the one on the right appears in the touch panel
display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow
the procedure below and the procedure that appears
in the touch panel display to remove the jammed
paper.
The paper has jammed. system Monitor
1 Open the upper cover of the feeder.

I
I
4 Remove the jammed original.
5 Close the middle cover.
A CAUTION
sonal injury.
6 Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow,

then remove the jammed original.
L
V)
a,
Zi
3
$
7 Once you have removed the entire jammed
cb
original, close the upper cover of the feeder.
A CAUTION
sonal injury.

8 Open the feeder, and remove any jammed
paper.
9 Close the feeder.
10Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.


Routine Cleaning
If the original is not scanned clearly, clean the following parts. For high-quality outputs, we recom-
mend cleaning them once or twice a month.
Platen glass
Rear side of platen glass
Feeder Scanning area
White plate, Roller
A WARNING
W h e n cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Fail-
ure to observe these items may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so might result in
plastic parts becoming deformed.
A CAUTION
Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of
I
I
the plug's metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result
- in a fire.
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.
I
Cleaning the Platen Glass1Rear Side of Platen Glass

Clean the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass following the procedure below.
0 IMPORTANT
If the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass is dirty, the original may not be scanned cleanly, or the
size of the original may be detected incorrectly.
Cleaning the Platen Glass

Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened
with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
- -
Routine Cleaning 8-25

Cleaning the Rear Side of Platen Glass
Clean the rear side of platen glass with a cloth
dampened with water, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
Cleaning the Feeder

Clean the feeder scanning area, white plate, and roller following the procedure below.
0 IMPORTANT
If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or dirty print output.
Spin the roller while cleaning it.
1 Open the feeder cover.
2 Clean the roller (total of 8 places) at the rear

side of the feeder cover with a cloth dampened
8-26 Routine Cleaning

3 Clean the roller (total of 3 places) as shown in
the illustration with a cloth dampened with
water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
4 Open the middle cover holding the knob in the

back.
5 Clean the roller (total of 5 places) with a cloth

cloth.
6 clean the roller (total of 4 places) with a cloth

cloth.

7 Close the middle cover.
A CAUTION
sonal injury.
I
I
~
i 8 close the feeder cover.
A CAUTION
sonal injury.
~ 9 open the feeder.
l g
i
00
10Clean the feeder scanning area with a cloth
1
cloth.

11 Clean the white plate with a cloth dampened
0 IMPORTANT
Do not push the white plate hard since the white
plate is soft.
12Close the feeder.

Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder
Cleaning)
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding them in the feeder caused by the
pencil power etc. on the roller, perform the Feeder Cleaning.
Cleaning is done by repeatedly feeding blank papers though the feeder.
@ NOTE
The Adjustment/Cleaningscreen is made up of several screens. Use the [ V ] and [ A ] keys to scroll to the
When the [ V ] or [ A ] key should be pressed, the indication - I is displayed in this manual.
It takes about 10 seconds to clean the feeder.
W h M
key .. .: , , ,9 Feeder i Cleanings +
@ ..............................................................................................................
2 Place 10 blank LTR-size paper in the feeder,

then press the [Start] key.
I Place 10 blank sheets in the feeder and
@ NOTE press the [Start] key.
To cancel Feeder Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.
.........................................................................
When the feeder is being cleaned, the message

on the right appears in the touch panel display.
Cleaning the Feeder ...
.................................................................................................


Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning)
If dirt appears on printed paper, clean the wire of the corona assemblies as the need arises.
@ NOTE
It takes about 30 seconds to clean the wire.
1 Call up the desired screen as follows: I

I
2 Press the [Start] key. .p

[Wire Cleaning1
@ NOTE
Please start wire cleaning.
To cancel Wire Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.
EZzJ
............... .- .............................................................................................................
[Cancel]
System Monitor ,
While wire cleaning is being performed, the
message to the right appears in the touch panel rn [Wire Cleaning1
display.
............................................................................................................................................
.-K
C
0
Cleaning wires ... System Monltor 0
V)
a,
E3
E
00

I
Self-diagnostic (error) messages appear in the touch panel display at the following times:
When printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
When you need to make a judgment or take some action during scanning or printing.
If a self-diagnostic message appears, follow the instructions in the touch panel display.
1 ~ d paper.
d I
The machine has run out of paper. No more prints Load paper.
can be made. (See "Loading Paper, " on p. 7-2.)
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted. Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go.
(See "Loading Paper, " on p. 7-2.)
1 Load LTR-size paper. I
The paper drawer loaded with the best paper size Load the indicated paper size in a paper drawer.
selected by the Automatic Paper selection is not If you press thema key while this message is
inserted into the machine. displayed, print will be made with the currently
selected paper size.
If the message remains even when the indicated

paper is loaded, set the Drawer Eligibility of that
paper drawer to "On". (See "Setting a Paper
Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer
Switching, " on p. 6- 10.)
aReturn page 1 to the top, and then

press the Start key.
Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the Arrange the originals in page order with the first
Feeder. page on top. Place the originals back in the Feeder
original supply tray, then press theShbkey.
8-32 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display

1 A Remove the paper from the output tray. 1
Prints from the previous job remain in the output Remove the prints from the output tray, then press
tray. thesm@key.
AAttach the finisher to the main unit.
1 The Finisher is not properly connected to the main Connect the Finisher to the main unit properly.
1 unit.
& Paper is jammed in the indicated

An original jam or paper jam has occurred, Remove paper from the machine following the
preventing you from making prints. guidance messages in the touch panel display.
(See "Removing Paper Jams, " on p. 8-2.)
1& Add toner.
There is not enough toner to print. Add toner using the toner bottle recommended for
use on this machine.
(See "Adding Toner, " on p. 7-8.)
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display 8-33

UG IR5000 Scan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UG IR5000 Scan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

, imageRUNNER

imageRUNNER 5000 Series

International Energy Star-Program

The International ENERGY STAR@Office Equipment Program is an international program that

Before You Start Using This Machine

Useful Copy Functions

Using the Mail Box Functions

Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Loadi~gPaper and Adding Toner

I~TER Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to

How This Manual is Organized 3

DANGER: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

Network Guide Remote UI User's Guide

PSIPCL Reference Guide Setup Guide

PCL Driver Guide PS Driver Guide

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals 5

Scanning an original to be copied, or

Outputting a copy, outputting data

6 Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

Parts and Their Functions...................................... 1.2

Chapter 2 Basic Copying

Flow of Copy Operations ...................................... 2.3

Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions

Making Copies of Facing Pages i n a Book onto Two Separate

Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions

Flow of Mail Box Operations ................................... 4.2

Changing the Exposure During Printing .......................... 5.2

Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Additional Functions Settings Table ............................. 6.3

Chapter 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner

Loading Paper ............................................... 7-2

Removing Paper Jams ........................................ 8.2

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled ................. .10.2

Specifications ............................................. .11.2

Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets

2 Pre3s the [Tw*page Separatlonl key.

1 Section Title 7 Reference

How to Use This Manual 15

16 Symbols Used in This Manual

Do not place the following items on the machine.

Do not install the machine in such a way that the

Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as

Do not remove the machine's fixing stoppers

Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet

Insert the power cord completely into the outlet,

Do not use power cords other than the provided

As a general rule, do not use extension cords.

Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging

Leave sufficient space around the power plug so

If the machine makes strange noises, or emits

When moving the machine, first turn OFF the

Do not drop paper clips, staples or other metal

Do not touch the Finisher while the machine is

T u r n OFF the power switch for safety when the

Maintenance and Inspections

Clean the machine using a firmly wrung-out cloth

Do not throw used toner bottles into open

There are some areas inside the machine which

The simbol inside the machine indicates that

When removing jammed paper or when inspect-

When removing paper which has become

When removing paper which has become

When loading paper or removing jammed origi-

When removing used toner bottles from the toner